WO2023231642A1 - Dual-card communication method and terminal device - Google Patents
Dual-card communication method and terminal device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2023231642A1 WO2023231642A1 PCT/CN2023/090157 CN2023090157W WO2023231642A1 WO 2023231642 A1 WO2023231642 A1 WO 2023231642A1 CN 2023090157 W CN2023090157 W CN 2023090157W WO 2023231642 A1 WO2023231642 A1 WO 2023231642A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- frequency band
- card
- terminal device
- dsda
- candidate
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 235
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 88
- 230000006854 communication Effects 0.000 title claims abstract description 88
- ZHBXLZQQVCDGPA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-[(1,3-dioxo-2-benzofuran-5-yl)sulfonyl]-2-benzofuran-1,3-dione Chemical compound C1=C2C(=O)OC(=O)C2=CC(S(=O)(=O)C=2C=C3C(=O)OC(C3=CC=2)=O)=C1 ZHBXLZQQVCDGPA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims abstract 6
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 claims description 35
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 claims description 8
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 description 259
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 67
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 62
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 33
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 22
- 238000010295 mobile communication Methods 0.000 description 20
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 17
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 16
- 230000005236 sound signal Effects 0.000 description 13
- 210000000988 bone and bone Anatomy 0.000 description 10
- 230000006855 networking Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 229920001621 AMOLED Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000013528 artificial neural network Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000036772 blood pressure Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004422 calculation algorithm Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000010985 leather Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000001755 vocal effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002159 abnormal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003416 augmentation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010009 beating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007175 bidirectional communication Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002457 bidirectional effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013529 biological neural network Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000004556 brain Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001149 cognitive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003862 health status Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001939 inductive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000002569 neuron Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013307 optical fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002096 quantum dot Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009877 rendering Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001568 sexual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003238 somatosensory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006641 stabilisation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011105 stabilization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013589 supplement Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/08—Reselecting an access point
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/24—Reselection being triggered by specific parameters
- H04W36/30—Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by measured or perceived connection quality data
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
- H04W48/20—Selecting an access point
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W8/00—Network data management
- H04W8/18—Processing of user or subscriber data, e.g. subscribed services, user preferences or user profiles; Transfer of user or subscriber data
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
- H04W88/02—Terminal devices
- H04W88/06—Terminal devices adapted for operation in multiple networks or having at least two operational modes, e.g. multi-mode terminals
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method and terminal device for dual-card communication in the field of communications.
- DSDA dual sim dual standby
- DSDA dual sim dual active
- the terminal device supports dual-card service concurrency, that is, dual cards can send or receive at the same time.
- the other card can receive incoming calls and perform data services (i.e., surf the Internet).
- the terminal device does not support concurrent dual-card services.
- the other card cannot perform data services.
- the incoming calls will not be made.
- the call service of the secondary card makes it impossible for the primary card to perform data services.
- the secondary card is unable to perform data services due to network search, measurement, tracking area update (TAU), SMS, MMS, periodic Registration and other behaviors will seize the antenna and affect the Internet experience of the main card.
- DSDA mode has a higher user experience.
- the current mainstream chips in terminal equipment on the market do not have perfect support for DSDA mode.
- terminal equipment is in DSDS mode instead of DSDA mode, thus reducing the user experience.
- Embodiments of the present application provide a dual-SIM communication method and terminal equipment, which can make the terminal equipment in DSDA mode as much as possible to improve user experience.
- the first aspect provides a dual-card communication method, which is applied to terminal equipment, including:
- the preset condition includes a first condition and a second condition.
- the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements.
- the second condition includes: the frequency band of the candidate cell can be compatible with the second card. The frequency band currently camped on forms the DSDA mode supported by the terminal equipment, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band;
- the first card is camped on the target frequency band.
- the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application retains the frequency band currently occupied by the second card, and determines the first candidate frequency band of the first card based on preset conditions.
- the obtained first candidate frequency band can not only meet the quality requirements but also be compatible with
- the frequency band currently occupied by the second card forms the DSDA mode, and then selects a frequency band from the first candidate frequency band as the target frequency band. Prompting the first card to reside on the target frequency band can cause a DSDA mode to be formed between the first card and the second card, thereby enabling the terminal device to be in the DSDA mode and improving user experience.
- the embodiment of the present application retains the frequency band where the second card currently resides and only interferes with the frequency band where the first card needs to reside, compared with the method of adjusting the frequency bands of both cards, the embodiment of the present application is easier Realize, and reduce to a certain extent the impact on users of service interruptions that may be caused by adjusting the frequency band.
- the first candidate frequency band includes a plurality of frequency bands; and, before the first card is camped on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, the Methods also include:
- the frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands is determined as the target frequency band.
- the terminal device uses the frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands as the target frequency band, and retains the current frequency band of the second card. Parking the first card in the target frequency band can make the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card the optimal mode set by the terminal device, improving the performance of the dual-card mode.
- the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where the second card currently resides.
- the terminal device uses the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where the second card currently resides as the frequency band with the highest priority. , retaining the frequency band where the second card currently resides, and parking the first card on the frequency band with the highest priority, can make the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card a dual-card mode with the best performance. User experience is the best.
- the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands.
- the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell satisfies the S criterion.
- the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application, in the scenario where the terminal device is powered on to select a cell, on the basis that the quality of the existing candidate cells meets the first condition of the S criterion, an additional feature is added to enable dual-card formation.
- the second condition of DSDA mode is to optimize and improve the existing process with fewer changes. It is easier to implement when the terminal equipment can be placed in DSDA mode.
- the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion.
- the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application in the scenario where the terminal device performs cell reselection, on the basis that the quality of the existing candidate cells meets the first condition of the S criterion and the R criterion, is added for making the
- the second condition for dual cards to form DSDA mode is to optimize and improve the existing process with fewer changes. It is easier to implement when the terminal device can be in DSDA mode.
- the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell meets the events used for cell switching, and the events used for cell switching include A3 events, A4 events, Either B1 event or B2 event.
- the dual-SIM communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application adds an additional function for making the cell switch happen on the basis that the quality of the existing candidate cells meets the first condition for the cell switch event in the scenario where the terminal device performs cell handover.
- the second condition for dual cards to form DSDA mode is to optimize and improve the existing process with fewer changes. It is easier to implement when the terminal device can be in DSDA mode.
- the first card is stationed in the target frequency band.
- the method also includes:
- the step of parking the first card on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band includes:
- the frequency band of the first card is adjusted so that the first card resides on the target frequency band.
- the first card is a secondary card
- the second card is a primary card
- the main card since the main card has a higher usage rate and generally conducts more phone services and Internet services, retaining the frequency band of the main card and adjusting the secondary card can reduce the need to adjust the frequency band.
- the impact on the main card's business is to ensure that the main card's business is as smooth as possible and users can enjoy the best experience.
- a dual-card communication method is provided and applied to terminal equipment, including:
- the candidate frequency band of the first card that satisfies the first preset condition and the candidate frequency band that satisfies the second preset condition.
- the candidate frequency band of the second card includes at least one frequency band
- the candidate frequency band of the second card includes at least one frequency band
- the first preset condition includes: for the first card
- the candidate cells of the second card satisfy the S criterion and the R criterion
- the second preset conditions include: the candidate cells of the second card satisfy the S criterion and the R criterion, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band;
- each DSDA combination including the candidate frequency band of the first card One of the frequency bands and one of the candidate frequency bands of the second card;
- the frequency bands of the first card and the second card are adjusted so that the first card and the second card respectively reside in the target On the frequency band corresponding to the dual cards in the DSDA combination.
- the dual-card communication method determines the candidate frequency band of the first card based on the first preset condition and determines the candidate frequency band of the second card based on the second preset condition.
- the obtained candidate frequency bands of the two cards can both satisfy The S criterion and R criterion of the cell reselection process, and then freely combine the candidate frequency bands of the two cards to obtain at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal equipment and select one DSDA combination from at least one DSDA combination as the target DSDA, for the first Adjusting the frequency bands of the card and the second card can form a DSDA mode between the first card and the second card, thereby making the terminal device in the DSDA mode and improving the user experience.
- the at least one DSDA combination includes a plurality of DSDA combinations; and, adjusting the frequency bands of the first card and the second card according to the target DSDA combination in the at least one DSDA combination.
- the method also included:
- the DSDA combination with the highest priority among the plurality of DSDA combinations is determined as the target DSDA combination.
- the DSDA combination with the highest priority can be used as the target DSDA combination to adjust the frequency bands of the first card and the second card.
- the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card is the optimal mode set by the terminal device, which improves the performance of the dual-card mode.
- the DSDA combination with the highest priority is the combination with the best dual-SIM mode capability among the multiple DSDA combinations.
- the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application uses the combination with the best dual-card mode capability among multiple DSDA combinations as the DSDA combination with the highest priority, and the terminal device compares the first card to the first card based on the DSDA combination with the highest priority. Adjusting the frequency band of the second card can make the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card a dual-card mode with the best performance and the best user experience.
- a third aspect provides a terminal device, which is configured to execute the method provided in the first or second aspect.
- the terminal device may include a module for executing any possible implementation of the first aspect or the second aspect.
- a fourth aspect provides a terminal device including a processor.
- the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any of the possible implementations of the first aspect or the second aspect.
- the terminal device further includes a memory.
- the device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
- a computer-readable storage medium is provided, with a computer program stored thereon.
- the computer program When the computer program is executed by a device, it causes the device to implement any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect or the second aspect. Methods.
- a sixth aspect provides a computer program product containing instructions that, when executed by a computer, cause a device to implement the method in any of the possible implementations of the first aspect or the second aspect.
- a chip including: an input interface, an output interface, a processor, and a memory.
- the input interface, the output interface, the processor, and the memory are connected through an internal connection path.
- the processor uses For executing the code in the memory, when the code is executed, the processor is configured to execute the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect or the second aspect.
- Figure 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a mobile communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 3 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 4 is another schematic flow chart of the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 5 is another schematic flow chart of the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 6 is another schematic flow chart of the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 7 is another schematic flow chart of the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 8 is another schematic flow chart of the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 9 is an exemplary block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application are applicable to terminal devices that can communicate with network devices and support dual-card communication.
- Each card can support telephone services and data services (i.e., Internet access services).
- the terminal device can be a mobile phone, a smart watch, a smart bracelet, or a tablet computer.
- the embodiments of this application do not place any restrictions on the specific types of terminal devices. .
- GSM global system for mobile communications
- GPRS general packet radio service
- CDMA code division multiple access Into
- WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
- TD-SCDMA time division code division multiple access
- LTE long term evolution
- FDD frequency division duplex
- TDD time division duplex
- 5G NR fifth generation new radio
- 6G sixth generation (6th generation, 6G) system, etc., among which, 5G NR is referred to as NR.
- the embodiments of the present application are applicable to a mobile communication system including multiple base stations and at least one terminal device, where the multiple base stations include at least a base station capable of supporting a 5G network and a base station capable of supporting a 4G network.
- the mobile communication system includes a base station 110, a base station 120 and a terminal device 130.
- One of the base station 110 and the base station 120 can support a 4G network, and the other can support a 5G network.
- the terminal device 130 can communicate with the base station. 110 is connected to at least one of the base stations 120.
- the base station that supports the 4G network will be referred to as the 4G base station
- the base station that supports the 5G network will be referred to as the 5G base station.
- both cards reside on the same network (4G network or 5G network). If the terminal device 130 is connected to the base station 110 and the base station 120, then the following three situations may occur.
- Case 1 The terminal device supports dual connection of the 4G network and the 5G network, and each of the two cards is in a dual connection state, that is, each card is connected to the 4G network and the 5G network at the same time.
- Case 3 The terminal device supports dual connections of the LTE network and the 5G network. One card resides on the 4G network or 5G network, and the other card is connected to both the 4G network and the 5G network at the same time.
- the mobile communication system may include multiple base stations 110 and/or multiple base stations 120 .
- a certain base station for example, base station 110 or base station 120
- base station 110 or base station 120 is a base station of a shared network
- the system still allows the dual cards to reside in the network supported by the base station, where the shared network is Networks shared by different operators.
- the mobile communication system includes one base station 110 and two base stations 120.
- the base station 110 is a 4G base station that shares a 4G network and the base station 120 is a 5G base station that does not share a 5G network
- one base station 120 supports operator 1 and the other base station 120 supports operator 2.
- the dual cards reside on the 4G network at the same time, the dual cards reside on the same base station 110 (i.e., 4G base station); if the dual cards reside on the 5G network at the same time, the dual cards reside on different base stations 120 (i.e., , 5G base station), card 1 resides on the base station 120 corresponding to operator 1, and card 2 resides on the base station 120 corresponding to operator 2.
- the base station 110 is a 5G base station that shares a 5G network and the base station 120 is a 4G base station that does not share a 4G network
- one base station 120 supports operator 1 and the other base station 120 supports operator 2.
- the dual cards reside on the 5G network at the same time, the dual cards reside on the same base station 110 (i.e., 5G base station); if the dual cards reside on the 4G network at the same time, the dual cards reside on different base stations 120 (i.e., , 4G base station), card 1 resides on the operating The card 2 resides on the base station 120 corresponding to the operator 1, and the card 2 resides on the base station 120 corresponding to the operator 2.
- the mobile communication system includes two base stations 110 and two base stations 120.
- the base station 110 is a 4G base station of a non-shared 4G network.
- one base station 110 supports operator 1, and the other base station 110 supports operator 2.
- the base station 120 is a 5G base station of a non-shared 5G network.
- One base station 120 supports operator 1, and the other base station 120 supports operator 2. If dual SIM cards are camped on the 4G network at the same time, then the dual SIM cards are camped on different base stations 110 (i.e., 4G base stations). Card 1 is camped on the base station 110 corresponding to operator 1, and card 2 is camped on operator 2.
- Card 1 resides on the base station 120 corresponding to operator 1
- card 2 It resides on the base station 120 corresponding to operator 2.
- the mobile communication system shown in Figure 1 is only a schematic illustration and should not limit the embodiments of the present application.
- the mobile communication system may also include core network equipment, as well as more base stations and terminal equipment.
- FIG. 2 shows a schematic structural diagram of the terminal device 200.
- the terminal device 200 may include a processor 210, an external memory interface 220, an internal memory 221, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 230, a charging management module 240, a power management module 241, a battery 242, an antenna 1, an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 250, wireless communication module 260, audio module 270, speaker 270A, receiver 270B, microphone 270C, headphone interface 270D, sensor module 280, button 290, motor 291, indicator 292, camera 293, display screen 294, and Subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 295, etc.
- SIM Subscriber identification module
- the sensor module 280 may include a pressure sensor 280A, a gyro sensor 280B, an air pressure sensor 280C, a magnetic sensor 280D, an acceleration sensor 280E, a distance sensor 280F, a proximity light sensor 280G, a fingerprint sensor 280H, a temperature sensor 280J, a touch sensor 280K, and ambient light.
- the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present application does not constitute a specific limitation on the terminal device 200.
- the terminal device 200 may include more or less components than shown in the figures, or combine some components, or split some components, or arrange different components.
- the components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
- the processor 210 may include one or more processing units.
- the processor 210 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) wait.
- application processor application processor, AP
- modem processor graphics processing unit
- GPU graphics processing unit
- image signal processor image signal processor
- ISP image signal processor
- controller memory
- video codec digital signal processor
- DSP digital signal processor
- NPU neural-network processing unit
- different processing units can be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
- the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the terminal device 200 .
- the controller can generate operation control signals based on the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
- the processor 210 may also be provided with a memory for storing instructions and data.
- the memory in processor 210 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have been recently used or recycled by processor 210 . If the processor 210 needs to use the instructions or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided and the waiting time of the processor 210 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
- processor 210 may include one or more interfaces.
- Interfaces may include integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) Interface, pulse code modulation (PCM) interface, universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), universal input and output (general- purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and/or universal serial bus (USB) interface, etc.
- I2C integrated circuit
- I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
- PCM pulse code modulation
- UART universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
- MIPI mobile industry processor interface
- MIPI mobile industry processor interface
- GPIO general- purpose input/output
- SIM subscriber identity module
- USB universal serial bus
- the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL).
- processor 210 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
- the processor 210 can couple the touch sensor 280K, the charger, the flash, the camera 293, etc. respectively through different I2C bus interfaces.
- the processor 210 can be coupled to the touch sensor 280K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 210 and the touch sensor 280K communicate through the I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the terminal device 200 .
- the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
- processor 210 may include multiple sets of I2S buses.
- the processor 210 can be coupled with the audio module 270 through the I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 210 and the audio module 270.
- the audio module 270 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 260 through the I2S interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
- the PCM interface can also be used for audio communications to sample, quantize and encode analog signals.
- the audio module 270 and the wireless communication module 260 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
- the audio module 270 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 260 through the PCM interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
- the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
- the bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
- a UART interface is typically used to connect the processor 210 and the wireless communication module 260 .
- the processor 210 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 260 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function.
- the audio module 270 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 260 through the UART interface to implement the function of playing music through the Bluetooth headset.
- the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 210 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 294 and the camera 293 .
- MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc.
- the processor 210 and the camera 293 communicate through the CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the terminal device 200.
- the processor 210 and the display screen 294 communicate through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the terminal device 200.
- the GPIO interface can be configured through software.
- the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
- the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 210 with the camera 293, display screen 294, wireless communication module 260, audio module 270, sensor module 280, etc.
- the GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
- the USB interface 230 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc.
- the USB interface 230 can be used to connect a charger to charge the terminal device 200, and can also be used to transmit data between the terminal device 200 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other terminal devices, such as AR devices.
- the interface connection relationships between the modules illustrated in the embodiments of this application are only schematic illustrations. It does not constitute a structural limitation on the terminal device 200. In other embodiments of the present application, the terminal device 200 may also adopt different interface connection methods in the above embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
- the charge management module 240 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
- the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
- the charging management module 240 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 230 .
- the charging management module 240 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the terminal device 200 . While charging the battery 242, the charging management module 240 can also provide power to the terminal device through the power management module 241.
- the power management module 241 is used to connect the battery 242, the charging management module 240 and the processor 210.
- the power management module 241 receives input from the battery 242 and/or the charging management module 240 and supplies power to the processor 210, internal memory 221, external memory, display screen 294, camera 293, wireless communication module 260, etc.
- the power management module 241 can also be used to monitor battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance) and other parameters.
- the power management module 241 may also be provided in the processor 210 .
- the power management module 241 and the charging management module 240 may also be provided in the same device.
- the wireless communication function of the terminal device 200 can be implemented through the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 250, the wireless communication module 260, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
- Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
- Each antenna in terminal device 200 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example: Antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless LAN. In other embodiments, antennas may be used in conjunction with tuning switches.
- the mobile communication module 250 can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the terminal device 200 .
- the mobile communication module 250 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc.
- the mobile communication module 250 can receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, perform filtering, amplification and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation.
- the mobile communication module 250 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation.
- at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 250 may be disposed in the processor 210 .
- at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 250 and at least part of the modules of the processor 210 may be provided in the same device.
- a modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
- the modulator is used to modulate the low-frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium-high frequency signal.
- the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal.
- the demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
- the application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to speaker 270A, receiver 270B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 294.
- the modem processor may be a stand-alone device.
- the modem processor may be independent of the processor 210 and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 250 or other functional modules.
- the wireless communication module 260 can provide applications on the terminal device 200 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) network), Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites. Wireless communication solutions such as global navigation satellite system (GNSS), frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR), etc.
- the wireless communication module 260 may be integrated with at least one communication unit one or more devices of the management module.
- the wireless communication module 260 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 210 .
- the wireless communication module 260 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 210, frequency modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
- the antenna 1 of the terminal device 200 is coupled to the mobile communication module 250, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 260, so that the terminal device 200 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
- the wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc.
- the GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi) -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
- GPS global positioning system
- GLONASS global navigation satellite system
- BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
- QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
- SBAS satellite based augmentation systems
- the terminal device 200 implements the display function through the GPU, the display screen 294, and the application processor.
- the GPU is an image processing microprocessor and is connected to the display screen 294 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
- Processor 210 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
- the display screen 294 is used to display images, videos, etc.
- Display 294 includes a display panel.
- the display panel can use a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode).
- LCD liquid crystal display
- OLED organic light-emitting diode
- AMOLED organic light-emitting diode
- FLED flexible light-emitting diode
- Miniled MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diode (QLED), etc.
- the terminal device 200 may include 1 or N display screens 294, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
- the terminal device 200 can implement the shooting function through the ISP, camera 293, video codec, GPU, display screen 294, application processor, etc.
- the ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 293. For example, when taking a photo, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera sensor through the lens, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera sensor passes the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be provided in the camera 293.
- Camera 293 is used to capture still images or video.
- the object passes through the lens to produce an optical image that is projected onto the photosensitive element.
- the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
- CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
- the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then passes the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
- ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing.
- DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other format image signals.
- the terminal device 200 may include 1 or N cameras 293, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
- Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the terminal device 200 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy.
- Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
- the terminal device 200 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the terminal device 200 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
- MPEG moving picture experts group
- MPEG2 MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
- NPU is a neural network (NN) computing processor.
- NN neural network
- the NPU can realize intelligent cognitive applications of the terminal device 200, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, etc.
- the external memory interface 220 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the terminal device 200.
- the external memory card communicates with the processor 210 through the external memory interface 220 to implement the data storage function. Such as saving music, videos, etc. files in external memory card.
- Internal memory 221 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions.
- the processor 210 executes instructions stored in the internal memory 221 to execute various functional applications and data processing of the terminal device 200 .
- the internal memory 221 may include a program storage area and a data storage area.
- the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required for a function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.).
- the storage data area may store data created during use of the terminal device 200 (such as audio data, phone book, etc.).
- the internal memory 221 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), etc.
- the terminal device 200 can implement audio functions through the audio module 270, the speaker 270A, the receiver 270B, the microphone 270C, the headphone interface 270D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
- the audio module 270 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signals. Audio module 270 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 270 may be provided in the processor 210 , or some functional modules of the audio module 270 may be provided in the processor 210 .
- Speaker 270A also called “speaker” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
- the terminal device 200 can listen to music through the speaker 270A, or listen to a hands-free call.
- Receiver 270B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
- the terminal device 200 answers a call or a voice message, the voice can be heard by bringing the receiver 270B close to the human ear.
- Microphone 270C also called “microphone” or “microphone” is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can speak close to the microphone 270C with the human mouth and input the sound signal to the microphone 270C.
- the terminal device 200 may be provided with at least one microphone 270C. In other embodiments, the terminal device 200 may be provided with two microphones 270C, which in addition to collecting sound signals, may also implement a noise reduction function. In other embodiments, the terminal device 200 can also be equipped with three, four or more microphones 270C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and implement directional recording functions, etc.
- the headphone interface 270D is used to connect wired headphones.
- the headphone interface 270D can be a USB interface 230 or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface.
- OMTP open mobile terminal platform
- CTIA Cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA
- the pressure sensor 280A is used to sense pressure signals and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals.
- pressure sensor 280A may be disposed on display screen 294.
- pressure sensors 280A such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors, etc.
- a capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates of conductive material.
- the terminal device 200 determines the intensity of the pressure based on the change in capacitance.
- the terminal device 200 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 280A.
- the terminal device 200 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 280A.
- touch operations acting on the same touch location but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
- the gyro sensor 280B may be used to determine the motion posture of the terminal device 200 .
- the angular velocity of the terminal device 200 about three axes may be determined by the gyro sensor 280B.
- the gyro sensor 280B can be used for image stabilization. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 280B detects the angle at which the terminal device 200 shakes, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shake of the terminal device 200 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake.
- the gyro sensor 280B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory gaming scenarios.
- Air pressure sensor 280C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the terminal device 200 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 280C to assist positioning and navigation.
- Magnetic sensor 280D includes a Hall sensor.
- the terminal device 200 may use the magnetic sensor 280D to detect the opening and closing of the flip leather case.
- the terminal device 200 may detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 280D. Then, based on the detected opening and closing status of the leather case or the opening and closing status of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
- the acceleration sensor 280E can detect the acceleration of the terminal device 200 in various directions (generally three axes). When the terminal device 200 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of terminal devices and be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
- the terminal device 200 can measure distance through infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the terminal device 200 can use the distance sensor 280F to measure distance to achieve fast focusing.
- Proximity light sensor 280G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode.
- the light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode.
- the terminal device 200 emits infrared light through a light emitting diode.
- the terminal device 200 detects infrared reflected light from nearby objects using photodiodes. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the terminal device 200 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the terminal device 200 may determine that there is no object near the terminal device 200 .
- the terminal device 200 can use the proximity light sensor 280G to detect when the user holds the terminal device 200 close to the ear for talking, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
- the proximity light sensor 280G can also be used in holster mode, and pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
- the ambient light sensor 280L is used to sense ambient light brightness.
- the terminal device 200 can illuminate according to the perceived ambient light. Adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 294 degrees.
- the ambient light sensor 280L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
- the ambient light sensor 280L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 280G to detect whether the terminal device 200 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touching.
- Fingerprint sensor 280H is used to collect fingerprints.
- the terminal device 200 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, access application lock, fingerprint photography, fingerprint answering incoming calls, etc.
- Temperature sensor 280J is used to detect temperature.
- the terminal device 200 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 280J to execute the temperature processing policy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 280J exceeds a threshold, the terminal device 200 reduces the performance of a processor located near the temperature sensor 280J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the terminal device 200 heats the battery 242 to prevent the low temperature from causing the terminal device 200 to shut down abnormally. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the terminal device 200 performs boosting on the output voltage of the battery 242 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
- Touch sensor 280K also called “touch panel”.
- the touch sensor 280K can be disposed on the display screen 294.
- the touch sensor 280K and the display screen 294 form a touch screen, which is also called a "touch screen”.
- the touch sensor 280K is used to detect a touch operation on or near the touch sensor 280K.
- the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the touch event type.
- Visual output related to the touch operation may be provided through display screen 294.
- the touch sensor 280K may also be disposed on the surface of the terminal device 200 in a position different from that of the display screen 294 .
- Bone conduction sensor 280M can acquire vibration signals.
- the bone conduction sensor 280M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human body's vocal part.
- the bone conduction sensor 280M can also contact the human body's pulse and receive blood pressure beating signals.
- the bone conduction sensor 280M can also be provided in the earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone.
- the audio module 270 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibrating bone obtained by the bone conduction sensor 280M to implement the voice function.
- the application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beat signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 280M to implement the heart rate detection function.
- the buttons 290 include a power button, a volume button, etc.
- Key 290 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button.
- the terminal device 200 may receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the terminal device 200 .
- the motor 291 can generate vibration prompts.
- the motor 291 can be used for vibration prompts for incoming calls and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
- touch operations for different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
- Acting on touch operations in different areas of the display screen 294, the motor 291 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
- Different application scenarios (such as time reminders, receiving information, alarm clocks, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
- the touch vibration feedback effect can also be customized.
- the indicator 292 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate charging status, power changes, or may be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, etc.
- the SIM card interface 295 is used to connect a SIM card.
- the SIM card can be inserted into the SIM card interface 295 or pulled out from the SIM card interface 295 to realize contact and separation from the terminal device 200 .
- the terminal device 200 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
- SIM card interface 295 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card, etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 295 at the same time. The types of the plurality of cards may be the same or different.
- the SIM card interface 295 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards.
- the SIM card interface 295 is also compatible with external memory cards.
- the terminal device 200 interacts with the network through the SIM card to realize calls and data. data communication and other functions.
- the terminal device 200 adopts eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
- the eSIM card can be embedded in the terminal device 200 and cannot be separated from the terminal device 200 .
- a dual-card mode supported by the terminal device can also be understood as the dual-card capability of the terminal device, and the receiving antennas of the dual-card cards are time-shared and multiplexed.
- the terminal device does not support concurrent dual-card services.
- the specific manifestations are: (1) When one card performs call services, the other card cannot perform data services (i.e., access the Internet); (2) When one card performs data services , although the other card can receive incoming calls, the incoming calls will interrupt the data service.
- the call service of the secondary card will make the main card unable to perform data services.
- the secondary card is required to search the network, measure, track area update (TAU), SMS, MMS, cycle Behaviors such as sexual registration will seize the antenna, making the main card's Internet experience poor.
- Dual receiver, dual card, dual standby dual receiver-dual sim dual dtandby, DR-DSDS
- Another dual-card mode supported by the terminal device can also be understood as another dual-card capability of the terminal device.
- the receiving antennas of the dual cards can be diversity multiplexed, that is, one card uses the main set and the other card uses the diversity. Can receive at the same time, but cannot send at the same time.
- DR-DSDS mode (1) when one card performs call service, the other card has a signal, but cannot respond to paging, and cannot perform TAU; (2) when one card performs data service, the other card performs uplink During transmission, the radio frequency (RF) antenna needs to be preempted, thus affecting the experience of the card performing data services.
- RF radio frequency
- Another dual-SIM mode supported by the terminal device can also be understood as another dual-SIM capability of the terminal device.
- DSDA mode the terminal device supports dual-card business concurrency, that is, two cards can send or receive at the same time. When one card performs call services, the other card can receive incoming calls and perform data services (i.e., surf the Internet).
- the DSDA mode may further include two modes, a DSDA transmit sharing mode and a DSDA transmit exclusive mode.
- the DSDA transmission sharing mode the two cards share an antenna and transmit in a time-sharing manner during uplink transmission.
- the two cards use different antennas during downlink transmission.
- the performance of the user's Internet access There is a loss of experience.
- DSDA transmission exclusive mode the two cards use different antennas for uplink transmission and different antennas for downlink transmission. Uplink transmission and downlink transmission are completely independent, and the user's online performance experience is basically without loss. Better performance experience than in DSDA launch exclusive mode.
- Non-standalone networking non-standalone, NSA
- independent networking standalone, SA
- 5G includes two networking methods: NSA and SA.
- NSA refers to the deployment of 5G networks using existing 4G core network and other facilities. It is a networking method that integrates 4G and 5G.
- the 5G carrier based on the NSA architecture only carries user data, and control signaling is still transmitted through the 4G network.
- 5G cannot work alone. It only serves as a supplement to 4G and shares 4G traffic.
- SA refers to the new 5G network, including new base stations, backhaul links and core networks. While SA introduces new network elements and interfaces, it will also adopt new technologies such as network virtualization and software-defined networks on a large scale and combine them with 5G NR. At the same time, it faces technical challenges in protocol development, network planning and deployment, and interoperability. Will surpass 3G and 4G systems.
- the current SA has two networking methods. One networking method uses 5G base stations to connect to the 5G core network. This is the ultimate form of 5G network architecture and can support all 5G applications, but it costs a lot; the other networking method square The method is to upgrade the existing 4G base station into an enhanced 4G base station, and connect the enhanced 4G base station to the 5G core network, which costs less.
- 4G can be used as an alternative description of LTE
- 5G can be used as an alternative description of NR. Unless otherwise specified, the two can be used as alternative descriptions.
- DSDA mode As mentioned before, compared to DSDS mode, DSDA mode has a better user experience. However, the current mainstream chips in terminal equipment on the market do not have perfect support for DSDA mode. In many scenarios, terminal equipment is in DSDS mode instead of DSDA mode, thus reducing the user experience. It can be seen that by making the terminal device in the DSDA mode as much as possible, the user experience can be improved.
- the dual-card mode supported by the terminal device is related to the network and frequency band in which each card is located.
- some frequency bands of the NR SA network and some frequency bands of the LTE network support the DSDA mode, and some frequency bands of the NR SA network and parts of the NR SA network
- the frequency band can support DSDA mode, where NR SA represents the 5G network, specifically indicating the 5G network with SA networking mode, referred to as NR SA, and LTE represents the 4G network.
- DSDA mode includes one or more DSDA combinations, and DSDA combinations include the network type and frequency band of dual cards.
- the DSDA combination can be expressed in the form of "network 1 frequency band number + network 2 frequency band number".
- the frequency band of the LTE network can be referred to as the LTE frequency band
- the frequency band of the NR network can be referred to as the NR frequency band.
- the LTE frequency band can be represented by the LTE band number, and the LTE band number can be represented by Bx, where x is an integer greater than 0, for example, B1 , similarly, the NR frequency band can be represented by the NR band number, and the NR band number can be represented by nx, where n is an integer greater than 0, for example, n78.
- a DSDA combination in DSDA mode is NR SA n41+LTE B1, which means that one card resides in the frequency band indicated by n41 in the NR SA network.
- n41 is the NR frequency band number, indicating an NR frequency band and another card. It resides in the frequency band indicated by B1 in the LTE network.
- B1 represents the LTE frequency band number and represents an LTE frequency band.
- the DSDA mode can be formed between the two cards, and the terminal device can be in DSDA mode. model.
- the embodiments of this application propose that by improving the network parking process in each scenario, when it is determined that the dual cards have a chance to form the DSDA mode, the frequency band of at least one card is adjusted so that the dual cards can camp in the DSDA mode.
- the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards enable a DSDA mode to be formed between the two cards. In this way, the terminal device is in DSDA mode, which can improve the user experience.
- card 1 is one of the primary card and the secondary card
- card 2 is the other of the primary card and the secondary card, without any limitation. If there is no special explanation, the explanation of Card 1 and Card 2 below is the same as here, and will not be repeated again.
- Figure 3 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method 300 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the method 300 can be executed by a terminal device that supports dual-SIM communication or by a chip in the terminal device.
- the embodiments of this application do not impose any limitations. For ease of description, method 300 will be described in detail by taking a terminal device as an example.
- the embodiment shown in method 300 is a scenario in which the terminal device is powered on to select a cell. During the process of powering on the terminal device and selecting a cell, the relevant design is used to ensure that the dual cards reside on the frequency band that can form the DSDA mode. In method 300, the network where the dual cards currently reside is defaulted. After one card has camped in a certain frequency band, the other card preferentially selects the frequency band that can form the DSDA mode to camp.
- the terminal device determines that card 1 has completed parking of the frequency band and card 2 has not performed parking of the frequency band.
- card 1 has completed parking the frequency band, and card 2 has not yet had time to park the frequency band.
- the frequency band that the card 1 currently resides in is any frequency band supported by the terminal device, and the embodiment of this application does not make any limitation.
- the frequency band where card 1 is currently camping is the frequency band in the network where card 1 is currently camping.
- the frequency band that card 1 currently resides on is the frequency band indicated by n41
- the frequency band indicated by n41 is the frequency band in the NR network.
- the terminal device determines the first candidate frequency band of the card 2 that meets the preset conditions.
- the first candidate frequency band includes one or more frequency bands.
- the terminal device measures multiple cells to determine whether there is a first candidate frequency band of the card 2 that meets the preset conditions in the multiple cells. If it exists, S330 is continued. If it does not exist, the process ends.
- the preset conditions include: the cell satisfies the S criterion, and the frequency band of the cell can form a DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band where the card 1 currently resides.
- the S criterion is a criterion for judging whether a certain cell can camp.
- the S criterion can be: the received power of a certain cell Srxlev>0dB and the signal quality of the received signal of a certain cell Squal>0dB during cell search.
- the terminal device can camp on the certain cell.
- the following is a brief introduction to the S criterion. For specific descriptions of the S criterion, please refer to the relevant descriptions in the 3GPP standards and will not be repeated.
- Srxlev Qrxlevmeas-Qrxlevmin-Pcompensation.
- Qrxlevmeas is the received signal code power (RSCP) value of the primary common control physical channel (primary common control physical channel, P-CCPCH) of the cell (that is, the currently measured cell), commonly known as the “level value” ".
- RSCP received signal code power
- P-CCPCH primary common control physical channel
- Qrxlevmin is the minimum received power of the cell. This parameter can be read from the system broadcast message.
- Pcompensation is a compensation value, which is the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the network and the maximum transmit power of the terminal power level.
- Pcompensation max(UE_TXP-WR_MAX_RACH-P_MAX, 0), UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH is the terminal device doing random operation.
- the maximum transmission power allowed on the random access channel (RACH) during access is sent by the system broadcast message.
- P_MAX is the maximum transmission power of the terminal device.
- Qqualmeas is the reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ) value of the cell
- Qqualmin is the minimum RSRQ value of the cell access
- Qqualminoffset is the minimum RSRQ offset value of the cell access.
- the terminal device measures multiple cells and first determines at least one cell that satisfies the S criterion.
- One cell corresponds to one frequency point and one frequency point corresponds to one frequency band (or, one cell corresponds to one frequency band).
- At least one frequency band corresponding to the at least one cell is called an initial candidate frequency band.
- the terminal device determines from the initial candidate frequency bands according to the DSDA mode information of the terminal device that can form a DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band where card 1 currently resides. The first candidate frequency band.
- the frequency point here represents the center frequency point, and the frequency point represents the number of the fixed frequency. According to the fixed frequency The frequency band can be obtained at the rate.
- the frequency bands in the first candidate frequency band are some or all of the initial candidate frequency bands. If all the frequency bands in the initial candidate frequency band can form the DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band where card 1 currently resides, the frequency band of the first candidate frequency band is all the frequency bands of the initial candidate frequency band; if some of the frequency bands in the initial candidate frequency band can and the frequency band where card 1 currently resides forms the DSDA mode supported by the terminal device, then the first candidate frequency band is part of the initial candidate frequency band.
- each frequency band in the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where card 1 currently resides can form a DSDA combination supported by the terminal device.
- the first candidate frequency band includes N frequency bands, which means that the first candidate frequency band The N frequency bands in and the frequency band where card 1 currently resides can form N DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device.
- DSDA mode information is used to indicate all DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device that can form a DSDA mode.
- Each DSDA combination includes the network type and frequency band of the dual card.
- DSDA mode information can be pre-configured in the terminal device.
- the DSDA combinations supported by the same terminal device are fixed, and the DSDA combinations supported by different terminal devices may be the same or different. The details may be determined based on the model or hardware information of the terminal device.
- the combinations of dual-card modes supported by a certain terminal device are listed in Table 1.
- the DSDA mode has 3 DSDA combinations.
- the DSDA transmission sharing mode is formed by NR SA n1+NR SA n1
- the DSDA combination is the DSDA combination formed by NR SA n1+NR SA n78 in the DSDA transmission exclusive mode, and the DSDA combination formed by NR SA n1+LTE B41 in the DSDA transmission exclusive mode.
- the three DSDA combinations in Table 1 can be all DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device indicated by the DSDA mode information.
- the following is an example of a process in which the terminal device determines the first candidate frequency band of the card 2 .
- the initial candidate frequency bands determined by card 2 that meet the S criterion include four frequency bands of network 2, namely frequency band 21, frequency band 22, frequency band 23 and frequency band 24.
- the terminal All DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device indicated by the device's DSDA mode information include 3 DSDA combinations, namely: DSDA combination 1 formed by "Network 1 Band 11 + Network 2 Band 21", and, formed by "Network 1 Band 11 + DSDA combination 2 formed by "network 2 frequency band 22", and DSDA combination 3 formed by "network 1 frequency band 12 + network 2 frequency band 23".
- frequency band 11 of network 1 (the frequency band where card 1 currently resides) and frequency band 21 in the initial candidate frequency band can form the DSDA combination 1 supported by the terminal device.
- Frequency band 11 of network 1 (the frequency band where card 1 currently resides)
- the frequency band 22 in the initial candidate frequency band can form the DSDA combination 2 supported by the terminal device.
- the frequency band 23 in the initial candidate frequency band cannot form a DSDA combination with the frequency band 11 of the network 1 (the frequency band where the card 1 currently resides). Therefore, the initial candidate frequency band The frequency band 23 in cannot become the first candidate frequency band.
- the DSDA combination supported by the terminal device does not include the frequency band 24 of network 2. Therefore, the frequency band 24 in the initial candidate frequency band cannot become the first candidate frequency band. Therefore, frequency band 21 and frequency band 22 are determined as the first candidate frequency bands.
- the terminal device determines the target frequency band from the first candidate frequency band and parks the card 2 on the target frequency band.
- the target frequency band can be any one of the multiple frequency bands, or it can be a certain frequency band determined according to the rules. Frequency band, there is no limitation here.
- the terminal device determines the frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands as the target frequency band.
- the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the frequency band where card 1 currently resides in the first candidate frequency band. That is to say, the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the frequency band where card 1 currently resides in the first candidate frequency band is the target frequency band.
- the priority of the frequency band in the first candidate frequency band is defined based on the capability of dual-SIM mode.
- the capabilities of dual-SIM mode from high to low are: DSDA transmitter exclusive > DSDA transmitter shared > DR-DSDS > DS.
- the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands. That is to say, the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands is the target frequency band.
- the priority of the frequency band in the first candidate frequency band is defined based on the signal strength of the frequency band. The better the signal strength of a certain frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, the higher the priority of this certain frequency band. On the contrary, the worse the signal strength of a certain frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, the lower the priority of this certain frequency band.
- the priority of the frequency bands in the first candidate frequency band defined above can be used alone or in combination.
- the capability of the dual-SIM mode is combined with the signal strength of the frequency band.
- the priority of the frequency band is first considered based on the capability of the dual-SIM mode, and then the signal strength of the frequency band is considered.
- band priority Generally, if there are multiple frequency bands in the first candidate frequency band that have the best dual-card mode capabilities in the DSDA mode formed by the frequency band where card 1 currently resides, the target frequency band can be further determined by combining the signal strength of the frequency bands.
- Figure 4 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method 400 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the method 400 can be executed by a terminal device that supports dual-SIM communication or by a chip in the terminal device.
- the embodiments of this application do not impose any limitations. For ease of description, method 400 will be described in detail by taking a terminal device as an example.
- the embodiment shown in method 400 is a scenario in which a terminal device performs cell reselection after it has camped in a cell.
- Cell reselection refers to the process in which the terminal equipment selects a cell with the best signal to provide service signals by monitoring the signal quality of neighboring cells and the current serving cell in idle mode.
- the terminal device can connect a card to the neighboring cell to camp on the frequency band of the neighboring cell.
- the relevant design is used to ensure that the dual cards reside on the frequency band that can form the DSDA mode.
- the network of the cell where the dual cards currently reside is defaulted, and the frequency band where a certain card resides is adjusted so that a DSDA mode is formed between the dual cards.
- the terminal device determines that card 1 and card 2 have completed parking of the frequency band.
- the terminal device determines whether the DSDA mode is formed between card 1 and card 2.
- step S430 is continued to enable DSDA to be formed between the dual cards as much as possible under the condition that certain conditions are met. mode to put the terminal device in DSDA mode.
- the DSDA mode of the terminal device is determined by the concurrency capability of the RF front end. Therefore, the dual-SIM mode of the terminal device can be identified through the RF driver.
- the terminal device determines the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1.
- the terminal device determines the adjacent cell frequency points of the same system and/or different systems where the card 1 is located.
- the neighboring frequency points of card 1 include one or more frequency points.
- the terminal device determines whether there is a first candidate frequency band for card 1 that satisfies preset condition 1 based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1.
- One frequency point corresponds to one frequency band. Therefore, the frequency band corresponding to each frequency point can be obtained according to the neighboring frequency points of card 1, and then the first candidate frequency band of card 1 that meets the preset conditions is obtained.
- card 2 still resides in the current frequency band and does not adjust the frequency band of card 2. It determines whether there is a first candidate frequency band for card 1 that meets the preset condition 1 based on the neighboring frequency points of card 1 to adjust card 1. frequency band. If the first candidate frequency band of card 1 that meets the preset condition 1 exists in the neighboring frequency point of card 1, which means that there is a chance to form a DSDA mode between the two cards, then continue to step S450; if the neighboring frequency point of card 1 There is no first candidate frequency band for card 1 that meets preset condition 1, which means that the frequency band corresponding to any frequency point in the neighboring frequency points of card 1 cannot form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where card 2 currently resides. Therefore, , you can try to adjust the frequency band of card 2 without adjusting the frequency band of card 1, that is, perform step S460, which will be described in detail later.
- the preset condition 1 is: the neighboring cell satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion, and the frequency band of the neighboring cell can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where the card 2 currently resides.
- the R criterion can be: within the Treselection time (the Treselection of the same frequency and the inter-frequency may be different), if the Rn of the neighboring cell continues to exceed the Rs of the serving cell, the terminal device will reselect to the neighboring cell.
- Qmeas is the reference signal receiving power (RSRP) value of the measurement cell
- Qmeas,s is the RSRP value of the serving cell
- Qmeas,n is the RSRP value of the neighboring cell
- Qoffset defines the offset of the neighboring cell.
- the offset value for inter-frequency cells with the same priority, includes two parts: a cell-based offset value and a frequency-based offset value.
- the terminal device first determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 that satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1, and then selects the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 from the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 based on the DSDA mode information of the terminal device. Determine the first candidate frequency band of card 1 that can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where card 2 currently resides.
- one cell corresponds to one frequency point and one frequency point corresponds to one frequency band (or, in other words, one cell has one frequency band).
- the terminal device determines at least one neighboring cell that satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion from the neighboring cell frequency points of card 1.
- Corresponding to at least one frequency point corresponds to at least one frequency point one-to-one, determine the corresponding frequency band according to each frequency point, and obtain at least one frequency band.
- the at least one frequency band is collectively referred to as the initial candidate frequency band of card 1; Then, based on the DSDA mode information of the terminal device, the first candidate frequency band of card 1 that can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where card 2 currently resides is determined from the initial candidate frequency bands of card 1 .
- the DSDA mode information of the terminal device please refer to the relevant description above.
- the relationship between the first candidate frequency band of card 1 and the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 please refer to the above description of the relationship between the first candidate frequency band and the initial candidate frequency band of card 1.
- the relevant description of the initial candidate frequency band will not be described again.
- each frequency band in the first candidate frequency band of card 1 and the frequency band currently occupied by card 2 can form a DSDA combination supported by the terminal device.
- the first candidate frequency band of card 1 includes N frequency bands. This means that the N frequency bands in the first candidate frequency band of card 1 and the frequency band where card 2 currently resides can form N DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device.
- the following is an example of a process in which the terminal device determines the first candidate frequency band of the card 1 .
- the initial candidate frequency bands of card 1 that meet the S criterion and R criterion include four frequency bands of network 1, namely frequency band 11, frequency band 12, frequency band 13 and Band 14, all DSDA combinations supported by the terminal equipment indicated by the DSDA mode information of the terminal equipment, there are 3 DSDA combinations, namely: DSDA combination 1 formed by "Network 1 Frequency Band 11 + Network 2 Frequency Band 21", and, formed by "Network 1 Frequency Band 11 + Network 2 Frequency Band 21" DSDA combination 2 is formed by "1 band 12 + network 2 band 21", and DSDA combination 3 is formed by "network 1 band 13 + network 2 band 22".
- frequency band 21 of network 2 (the frequency band where card 2 currently resides) and frequency band 11 in the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 can form the DSDA combination 1 supported by the terminal device.
- Frequency band 21 of network 2 (where card 2 currently resides)
- the frequency band) and the frequency band 12 in the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 can form the DSDA combination 2 supported by the terminal device.
- the frequency band 13 in the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 cannot be combined with the frequency band 21 of network 2 (the frequency band where card 2 currently resides)
- a DSDA combination is formed, so frequency band 13 in the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 cannot become the first candidate frequency band.
- the DSDA combination supported by the terminal device does not include frequency band 14 of network 1.
- frequency band 13 in the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 Band 14 cannot be the first candidate band either. Therefore, frequency band 11 and frequency band 12 are determined as the first candidate frequency band of card 1. In this way, the first candidate frequency band of card 1 that meets the preset condition 1 is obtained.
- the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band described in steps S440 and S450 are both relevant frequency bands of card 1
- the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band described in steps S460 and S470 are both card 2
- Relevant frequency bands unless otherwise specified, the explanations about these frequency bands in method 400 shall be subject to the explanations here, and will not be described again below.
- the terminal device determines the target frequency band 1 from the first candidate frequency band of the card 1, and adjusts the frequency band of the card 1 so that the card 1 resides on the target frequency band 1.
- the first candidate frequency band of card 1 includes one frequency band, this unique frequency band is determined as target frequency band 1. If the first candidate frequency band of card 1 includes multiple frequency bands, then determine one of the multiple frequency bands as the target frequency band 1.
- the target frequency band 1 can be any one of the multiple frequency bands, or it can be based on A certain frequency band determined by the rules, there are no restrictions here.
- the terminal device determines the frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands of card 1 as target frequency band 1.
- the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band of card 1 and the frequency band where card 2 currently resides. That is to say, among the first candidate frequency bands of card 1 and the frequency band where card 2 currently resides, the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode is the target frequency band 1.
- the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands of card 1 .
- the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands of card 1 is target frequency band 1.
- determining the target frequency band 1 from the first candidate frequency band of the card 1 please refer to the above related description of determining the target frequency band from the first candidate frequency band, which will not be described again.
- the terminal device determines the neighboring cell frequency point of card 2.
- the terminal device determines that there is no first candidate frequency band for card 1 that satisfies preset condition 1 based on the neighboring frequency points of card 1, it means that the frequency corresponding to any one of the neighboring frequency points of card 1 None of the frequency bands can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where card 2 currently resides. Therefore, you can try to adjust the frequency band of card 2 without adjusting the frequency band of card 1, that is, perform step S460.
- the terminal device determines the adjacent cell frequency points of the same system and/or different systems where the card 2 is located.
- the neighboring frequency points of card 2 include one or more frequency points.
- the terminal device determines whether there is a first candidate frequency band for card 2 that satisfies preset condition 2 based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 2.
- One frequency point corresponds to one frequency band. Therefore, the frequency band corresponding to each frequency point can be obtained according to the neighboring frequency points of card 2, and then the first candidate frequency band of card 2 that meets the preset condition 2 is obtained.
- card 1 still resides in the current frequency band, does not adjust the frequency band of card 1, and determines whether there is a first candidate frequency band for card 2 that meets the preset condition 2 based on the neighboring frequency points of card 2. If the first candidate frequency band of card 2 that meets the preset condition 2 exists in the neighboring frequency point of card 2, which means that there is a chance to form a DSDA mode between the two cards, then continue to step S480. If the neighboring frequency point of card 2 There is no first candidate frequency band for card 2 that meets preset condition 2, which means that the frequency band corresponding to any frequency point in the neighboring frequency points of card 1 cannot form a frequency band with the frequency band where card 2 currently resides. DSDA mode, end the process.
- the preset condition 2 is: the neighboring cell satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion, and the frequency band of the neighboring cell can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where the card 1 currently resides.
- the terminal device first determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 that satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1, and then determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 from the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 based on the DSDA mode information of the terminal device. Determine the first candidate frequency band of card 2 that can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where card 1 currently resides.
- the process of determining the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 and the first candidate frequency band of card 2 is similar to the process of determining the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 and the first candidate frequency band of card 1 above.
- determining the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 and the first candidate frequency band of card 2 For a specific description of the first candidate frequency band of card 2, reference may be made to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
- the terminal device determines the target frequency band 2 from the first candidate frequency band of the card 2, and adjusts the frequency band of the card 2 so that the card 2 resides on the target frequency band 2.
- the first candidate frequency band of card 2 includes one frequency band, this unique frequency band is determined as target frequency band 2. If the first candidate frequency band of card 2 includes multiple frequency bands, then a certain frequency band in the multiple frequency bands is determined as the target frequency band 2.
- the target frequency band 2 can be any one of the multiple frequency bands, or it can be based on A certain frequency band determined by the rules, there are no restrictions here.
- the terminal device determines the frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands of the card 2 as the target frequency band 2.
- the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band of card 2 and the frequency band where card 1 currently resides. That is to say, among the first candidate frequency bands of card 2 and the frequency band where card 1 currently resides, the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode is the target frequency band 2.
- the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands of the card 2 .
- the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands of card 2 is target frequency band 2.
- determining the target frequency band 2 from the first candidate frequency band of the card 2 please refer to the above related description of determining the target frequency band from the first candidate frequency band, which will not be described again.
- the process can be ended directly without trying to adjust the frequency band of card 2.
- the terminal device can determine the neighboring frequency band of card 1 and the neighboring frequency point of card 2 in advance. In S440, if the terminal device determines that there is no third frequency band of card 1 that meets the preset condition 1, For a candidate frequency band, S470 can be executed directly based on the neighboring frequency band of card 2 determined in advance.
- the order of adjustment card 1 and adjustment card 2 can be adjusted, that is, after S420, S460-S480 can be executed first, and when the conditions are not met, S430-S450 can be executed again.
- FIG. 5 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method 500 provided by an embodiment of the present application. Same as above method Embodiment, for convenience of description, the method 500 is described in detail by taking a terminal device as an example.
- the embodiment shown in method 500 is also a scenario where the terminal device performs cell reselection after it has camped in a cell.
- the difference from method 400 is that the terminal device detects the neighboring frequency points of card 1 and card 2 in advance, and determines that card 1 and card 2 can form at least one DSDA combination in the DSDA mode based on the neighboring frequency points of card 1 and card 2. , adjust the frequency band in which card 1 and card 2 reside according to a certain DSDA combination in at least one DSDA combination, so that card 1 and card 2 reside in the frequency band corresponding to the two cards in the certain DSDA combination.
- the network of the cell where card 1 and card 2 currently reside is defaulted, and the frequency bands where card 1 and card 2 reside are adjusted so that a DSDA mode is formed between the two cards.
- the terminal device determines that card 1 and card 2 have completed parking of the frequency band.
- the terminal device determines whether the DSDA mode is formed between card 1 and card 2.
- the terminal device determines the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1 and the neighboring cell frequency point of card 2.
- the terminal device determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 and the initial candidate frequency band of card 2.
- the terminal device determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1, and determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 2.
- One frequency point corresponds to one frequency band. Therefore, the frequency band corresponding to each frequency point can be obtained based on the neighboring cell frequency points, and then the initial candidate frequency bands for Card 1 and Card 2 are obtained.
- the terminal device determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 that satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1.
- one cell corresponds to one frequency point
- one frequency point corresponds to one frequency band.
- the terminal device determines from the neighboring cell frequency points of card 1 at least one frequency point corresponding to at least one neighboring cell that satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion (at least one neighboring cell area corresponds one-to-one with at least one frequency point), the corresponding frequency band is determined according to each frequency point, and at least one frequency band is obtained.
- the at least one frequency band is collectively referred to as the initial candidate frequency band of card 1.
- the process in which the terminal device determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 based on the neighboring cell frequency of card 2 is similar to the process in which the terminal device determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 based on the neighboring cell frequency of card 1, and will not be described again.
- the terminal device determines whether at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device can be formed between the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 and the initial candidate frequency band of card 2.
- Each DSDA combination includes one of the initial candidate frequency bands for Card 1 and one of the initial candidate frequency bands for Card 2.
- the terminal device may determine, based on the DSDA mode information of the terminal device, whether at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device can be formed between the initial candidate frequency bands of the two cards. If the initial candidate frequency bands of the two cards can form at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device, which means that the dual cards have the opportunity to form a DSDA mode, then execute S560; if the initial candidate frequency bands of the two cards cannot form a combination supported by the terminal device. At least one DSDA combination, the process ends.
- the following is an example of a process in which the terminal device determines at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device.
- card 1 resides in network 1
- the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 includes three frequency bands of network 1, namely: frequency band 11, frequency band 12, and frequency band 14.
- Card 2 resides in network 2, and the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 Including 2 frequency bands of network 2, namely frequency band 21 and frequency band 22.
- All DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device indicated by the DSDA mode information of the terminal device include 3 DSDA combinations, namely: "Network 1 frequency band 11 + Network 2 frequency band” DSDA combination 1 formed by "21”, and the DSDA group formed by "Network 1 frequency band 12 + Network 2 frequency band 21" Combined 2, DSDA combination 3 formed by "Network 1 frequency band 14 + Network 2 frequency band 21".
- band 11 in card 1's initial candidate band and band 21 in card 2's initial candidate band may form DSDA combination 1
- band 12 in card 1's initial candidate band and band 21 in card 2's initial candidate band DSDA combination 2 can be formed. Therefore, the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 and the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 can form a DSDA combination, and two DSDA combinations can be formed.
- the terminal device adjusts the frequency bands of card 1 and card 2 according to the target DSDA combination in at least one DSDA combination, so that card 1 and card 2 respectively reside on the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination.
- the terminal device determines the target DSDA combination from at least one DSDA combination, and adjusts the frequency bands of card 1 and card 2 according to the target DSDA combination, that is, neither card 1 nor card 2 resides in the current frequency band. Instead, the frequency band is reselected to reside.
- Card 1 and Card 2 respectively reside in the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination. It should be understood that the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination are the frequency band ultimately used for card 1 to reside determined from the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 and the final frequency band determined from the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 due to card 2 Frequency band to stay in.
- the target DSDA combination is this unique DSDA combination. If at least one DSDA combination is multiple DSDA combinations, the target DSDA combination is a DSDA combination among the multiple DSDA combinations.
- the target DSDA combination can be any DSDA combination among the multiple DSDA combinations, or it can be based on The DSDA combination determined by the rules is not limited here.
- the DSDA combination with the highest priority among the multiple DSDA combinations may be determined as the target DSDA combination.
- the DSDA combination with the highest priority is the combination with the best dual-SIM mode capability among the multiple DSDA combinations.
- This embodiment is to define the DSDA combination priority from the capability of dual-SIM mode.
- the capabilities of the dual-card mode from high to low are: DSDA transmitter exclusive > DSDA transmitter shared > DR-DSDS > DSDS.
- the priority of the DSDA combination from high to low can be: DSDA transmitter exclusive > DSDA transmitter shared > DR -DSDS>DSDS.
- Figure 6 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method 600 provided by an embodiment of the present application. Similar to the above method embodiments, for convenience of description, method 600 will be described in detail by taking a terminal device as an example.
- the embodiment shown in method 600 is a process of cell handover (handover) after the terminal device has camped in a cell.
- Cell handover refers to the channel switching required to maintain normal communication for users when the terminal equipment moves from one cell to another.
- the terminal device can switch from the current serving cell to a neighboring cell that meets the requirements.
- the relevant design is used to ensure that the frequency band where one card resides after switching cells and the frequency band where another card currently resides can form a DSDA mode.
- the network of the cell where the two cards currently reside is defaulted, and the frequency band where one card resides is adjusted so that a DSDA mode is formed between the two cards.
- the terminal device determines that card 1 and card 2 have completed parking the frequency band, and no DSDA mode has been formed between card 1 and card 2.
- the network device sends neighbor cell measurement configuration information to the terminal device, which is used to configure neighbor cell measurement of one of card 1 and card 2. Among them, one of the cards is in the connected state.
- the network device sends neighboring cell measurement configuration information to the terminal device, and the terminal device can measure the neighboring cell, so that after the frequency band of the neighboring cell meets certain conditions, one of the cards can switch to the neighboring cell to achieve
- the purpose of adjusting the frequency band of one of the cards is to form a DSDA mode with the other card, which is a card other than one of Card 1 and Card 2.
- the other card still resides in the current frequency band of the cell and does not adjust the frequency band of the other card. It only attempts to switch one of the cards to a neighboring cell that meets the conditions to adjust one of the cards. The purpose of the card's frequency band.
- the main card is always in a connected state, so in an example, one of the cards may be the main card.
- one of the cards when Card 1 is the main card, one of the cards is Card 1, and when Card 2 is the main card, one of the cards is Card 2.
- the secondary card is sometimes in a connected state (for example, the secondary card performs call services), so one of the cards can also be the secondary card.
- the neighbor cell measurement configuration information includes: multiple cell identifiers of multiple neighbor cells, one neighbor cell corresponding to one cell identifier; event information used to indicate events for cell switching corresponding to each neighbor cell.
- the event used for cell handover corresponding to each neighboring cell may be any of the following events: A3 event, A4 event, B1 event or B2 event.
- the A3 event represents an event in which the quality of a neighboring cell in the same system and frequency as the serving cell is higher than the quality of the serving cell.
- the A4 event indicates an event in which the quality of the neighboring cell in the same system and different frequency as the serving cell is higher than a threshold.
- the B1 event represents an event in which the quality of a neighboring cell in a different system from the serving cell is higher than a threshold.
- the B2 event represents an event in which the quality of the neighboring cell in a different system from the serving cell is higher than one threshold and the quality of the serving cell is lower than another threshold.
- RSRP reference signal receiving power
- RE resource elements
- each neighbor cell corresponds to an event.
- the events corresponding to different neighbor cells can be the same or different, depending on the relationship between the serving cell and the neighbor cell. For example, if a neighboring cell is a cell with the same system and frequency as the serving cell, the network device configures the A3 event for the neighboring cell. If a neighboring cell is a cell of the same system and different frequency of the serving cell, the network device configures the A4 event for the neighboring cell.
- the neighboring cell measurement configuration information may also include: a measurement report identifier of the measurement report corresponding to each neighboring cell.
- a measurement report can be reported to the network device according to the corresponding measurement report identifier.
- the terminal device determines the first candidate frequency band of one of Card 1 and Card 2 that meets the preset condition.
- the terminal device measures multiple neighboring cells according to the neighboring cell measurement configuration information, and determines whether there is a first candidate frequency band for one of card 1 and card 2 that meets the preset conditions in the multiple neighboring cells. If it exists, continue to execute S640; if it does not exist, the process ends.
- the preset conditions are: the neighboring cell meets the events for cell switching, and the frequency band of the neighboring cell can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where another card currently resides.
- events used for cell handover please refer to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
- the terminal device measures multiple neighboring cells according to the neighboring cell measurement configuration information, and obtains To the RSRP value of each neighboring cell, according to the RSRP value of each neighboring cell, first determine at least one neighboring cell whose RSRP value satisfies the event used for cell handover.
- One neighboring cell corresponds to one frequency band (or one neighboring cell has one frequency band), and then At least one frequency band corresponding to the at least one neighboring cell is called an initial candidate frequency band.
- the terminal device determines the first candidate from the initial candidate frequency bands that can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where another card currently resides based on the DSDA mode information of the terminal device. frequency band.
- the DSDA mode information of the terminal device please refer to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
- the frequency bands in the first candidate frequency bands are part or all of the initial candidate frequency bands. If all the frequency bands in the initial candidate frequency band can form a DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band currently occupied by another card, the frequency band of the first candidate frequency band is all the frequency bands of the initial candidate frequency band; if some of the frequency bands in the initial candidate frequency band If it can form a DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band currently occupied by another card, then the first candidate frequency band is part of the initial candidate frequency band.
- each frequency band in the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band currently occupied by another card can form a DSDA combination supported by the terminal device.
- the first candidate frequency band includes N frequency bands, which means that the first candidate frequency band N frequency bands in the frequency band and the frequency band where another card currently resides can form N DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device.
- the terminal device determines the target frequency band from the first candidate frequency band.
- this unique frequency band is determined as the target frequency band.
- the target frequency band can be any one of the multiple frequency bands, or it can be a certain frequency band determined according to the rules. Frequency band, there is no limitation here.
- the terminal device determines the frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands as the target frequency band.
- the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where another card currently resides. That is to say, the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability among the DSDA modes formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where another card currently resides is the target frequency band.
- the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands. That is to say, the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands is the target frequency band.
- the priority of the frequency bands in the above-mentioned first candidate frequency band can be used alone or in combination.
- the terminal device sends a measurement report to the network device, where the measurement report is used to indicate the target frequency band.
- the terminal device In this step, the terminal device generates a measurement report indicating the target frequency band and sends it to the network device.
- the measurement report may indicate the target frequency band implicitly or explicitly indicate the target frequency band, and this embodiment of the present application does not impose any limitation.
- the measurement report may implicitly indicate the target frequency band. Implicit indication means that the target frequency band will not be directly read through the measurement report, but the target frequency band can be obtained by combining the read content with other information.
- the neighboring cell measurement configuration information may include the measurement report identification corresponding to each neighboring cell. When a certain neighboring cell meets the handover requirements, the measurement report may be reported to the network device according to the corresponding measurement report identification. right For the neighboring cell with the target frequency band (denoted as neighboring cell 1), when the handover requirements are met, a measurement report (denoted as measurement report 1) is reported to the network device according to the measurement report identifier corresponding to neighboring cell 1. In the measurement report 1 The target frequency band is not included. However, the network device can determine that the cell corresponding to measurement report 1 is neighboring cell 1 based on the measurement report identifier of measurement report 1, and naturally determines the target frequency band corresponding to neighboring cell 1.
- the network device sends a switching instruction to instruct the frequency band where one of the cards resides to be switched to the target frequency band.
- the terminal device switches one of card 1 and card 2 to the target frequency band.
- the terminal device switches one of the cards 1 and 2 from the current frequency band to the target frequency band based on the switching instruction sent by the network device, thereby realizing the adjustment of the frequency band of one of the cards.
- a DSDA mode is formed between card 1 and card 2, which improves user experience.
- the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band are the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band for card 2
- the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band are both the initial candidate frequency band for card 1 and the first candidate frequency band, which may also be the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band for card 2.
- the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band are the initial candidate frequency bands for one of card 1 and card 2. and the first candidate frequency band.
- Figure 7 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method 700 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the method 700 can be executed by a terminal device that supports dual-SIM communication, or by a chip in the terminal device.
- the embodiments of this application do not impose any limitations. For ease of description, method 700 will be described in detail by taking a terminal device as an example.
- the first card is a card whose frequency band needs to be adjusted or to be parked
- the second card is a card that has completed the frequency band parking and does not adjust the frequency band.
- the first card can be one of the main card and the secondary card
- the second card can be the other card of the main card and the secondary card.
- the first card is the secondary card and the second card is the primary card to reduce the impact of frequency band adjustment on the primary card's services.
- the terminal device determines the first candidate frequency band of the first card that meets the preset conditions.
- the frequency band includes one or more frequency bands.
- the preset condition includes a first condition and a second condition.
- the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements.
- the second condition includes: the frequency band of the candidate cell can communicate with the second card.
- the frequency band currently camped on forms the DSDA mode supported by the terminal equipment, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band.
- the terminal device will first determine whether the DSDA mode is formed between the first card and the second card. If the DSDA mode is not formed, the frequency band currently occupied by the second card will be retained, and the multiple candidates of the first card will be The cell performs measurements. One candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band. Based on all the frequency bands corresponding to the plurality of candidate cells, the first candidate frequency band of the first card that meets the preset conditions is determined to try to adjust the frequency band of the first card so that the first DSDA mode is formed between the card and the second card.
- the process for the terminal device to determine the first candidate frequency band of the first card that meets the preset conditions may be as follows:
- the terminal device determines an initial candidate frequency band of the first card that satisfies the first condition, and the initial candidate frequency band includes one or more frequency bands;
- the terminal device determines the first candidate frequency band that satisfies the second condition from the initial candidate frequency bands.
- the terminal device measures multiple candidate cells of the first card, first determines at least one candidate cell that meets the first condition (that is, the quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements), one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band, and the at least one candidate cell is At least one frequency band corresponding to a candidate cell is called an initial candidate frequency band.
- the terminal device determines from the initial candidate frequency bands according to the DSDA mode information of the terminal device that satisfies the second condition (that is, the frequency band of the candidate cell can be compatible with the second card currently camped on).
- the frequency band forms the first candidate frequency band for the DSDA mode supported by the terminal device).
- the frequency bands in the first candidate frequency bands are part or all of the initial candidate frequency bands. If all the frequency bands in the initial candidate frequency band can form the DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band where the second card currently resides, the frequency band of the first candidate frequency band is all the frequency bands of the initial candidate frequency band; if some of the frequency bands in the initial candidate frequency band If it can form a DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band currently occupied by the second card, then the first candidate frequency band is part of the initial candidate frequency band.
- each frequency band in the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band currently occupied by the second card can form a DSDA combination supported by the terminal device.
- the first candidate frequency band includes N frequency bands, which means that the first candidate frequency band The N frequency bands in the frequency band and the frequency band where the second card currently resides can form N DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device.
- DSDA mode information is used to indicate all DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device that can form a DSDA mode.
- Each DSDA combination includes the network type and frequency band of the dual card.
- DSDA mode information can be pre-configured in the terminal device.
- the DSDA combinations supported by the same terminal device are fixed, and the DSDA combinations supported by different terminal devices may be the same or different.
- the details may be determined based on the model or hardware information of the terminal device. For specific description, please refer to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
- the terminal device camps the first card on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band.
- the target frequency band can be any one of the multiple frequency bands, or it can be a certain frequency band determined according to the rules. Frequency band, there is no limitation here.
- the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application retains the frequency band currently occupied by the second card, and determines the first candidate frequency band of the first card based on preset conditions.
- the obtained first candidate frequency band can not only meet the quality requirements but also be compatible with
- the frequency band where the second card currently resides forms a DSDA mode, and then a frequency band is selected from the first candidate frequency band as the target frequency band, prompting the first card to reside on the target frequency band, which can form a DSDA mode between the first card and the second card , thereby enabling the terminal device to be in DSDA mode, improving user experience.
- the embodiment of the present application retains the frequency band where the second card currently resides and only interferes with the frequency band where the first card needs to reside, compared with the method of adjusting the frequency bands of both cards, the embodiment of the present application is easier Realize, and reduce to a certain extent the impact on users of service interruptions that may be caused by adjusting the frequency band.
- the method 700 further includes: the terminal device sets the target frequency band. The frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands is determined as the target frequency band.
- the terminal device uses the frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands as the target frequency band, and retains the current frequency band of the second card. Parking the first card in the target frequency band can make the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card the optimal mode set by the terminal device, improving the performance of the dual-card mode.
- the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where the second card currently resides. That is to say, the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where the second card currently resides is the target frequency band.
- This embodiment defines the priority of the frequency band in the first candidate frequency band based on the capability of the dual-card mode. For specific description, please refer to the relevant description of the priority of the frequency band in the first candidate frequency band of card 2 in S330 above, which will not be described again. , just replace card 2 above with the first card here and card 1 above with the second card here.
- the terminal device uses the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where the second card currently resides as the frequency band with the highest priority. , retaining the frequency band where the second card currently resides, and parking the first card on the frequency band with the highest priority, can make the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card a dual-card mode with the best performance. User experience is the best.
- the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the strongest signal in the first candidate frequency band. That is to say, the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands is the target frequency band.
- the priority of the frequency band in the first candidate frequency band is defined based on the signal strength of the frequency band.
- the relevant description of the priority of the frequency band in the first candidate frequency band of card 2 in S330 above No further details will be given. Replace the above card 2 with the first card here and replace the above card 1. Just the second card here.
- the preset condition is a judgment condition used to determine the first candidate frequency band of the first card.
- the first condition in the preset condition is related to the quality of the candidate cell, including: the quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements.
- the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell satisfies the S criterion.
- the S criterion please refer to the relevant description in the method 300 above, and will not be described again.
- the quality of the candidate cell may be represented by the received power Srxlev of the candidate cell and the signal quality Squal of the received signal.
- the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application can correspond to the implementation process of method 300 above.
- the first card may be card 2 in the above method 300
- the second card may be card 1 in the above method 300.
- the first candidate frequency band of the first card may be the first candidate frequency band of card 2 in the method 300. Determine the first For a detailed description of the first candidate frequency band of the card and the process of determining the target frequency band, please refer to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
- the second card has completed parking on the frequency band, and the first card has not yet completed parking on the frequency band.
- the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application, in the scenario where the terminal device is powered on to select a cell, on the basis that the quality of the existing candidate cells meets the first condition of the S criterion, an additional feature is added to enable dual-card formation.
- the second condition of DSDA mode is to optimize and improve the existing process with fewer changes. It is easier to implement when the terminal equipment can be placed in DSDA mode.
- the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell satisfies the S criterion and R guidelines.
- S criterion and R criterion please refer to the relevant description of the method 400 above, and will not be described again.
- the quality of the candidate cell may be represented by the received power Srxlev of the candidate cell, the signal quality Squal and RSRP of the received signal. It should be noted that the candidate cell here is a neighboring cell of the serving cell where the first card is camped.
- the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the implementation process of the above method 400.
- the first card can be card 1 in the above method 400
- the second card can be the card 2 in the above method 400
- the first candidate frequency band of the first card can be the card 1 in the method 400.
- the first candidate frequency band, the preset frequency band in this case is the preset frequency band 1 in S440
- the target frequency band in this case is the target frequency band 1 in S450
- the process of determining the first candidate frequency band of the first card and determining the target frequency band For detailed description, please refer to the relevant descriptions of S430 to S450, and will not be described again.
- the first card can be card 2 in the above method 400
- the second card can be the card 1 in the above method 400
- the first candidate frequency band of the first card can be the card 2 in the method 400.
- the first candidate frequency band, the preset frequency band in this case is the preset frequency band 2 in S470
- the target frequency band in this case is the target frequency band 2 in S480
- the process of determining the first candidate frequency band of the first card and determining the target frequency band For detailed description, please refer to the relevant descriptions from S460 to S480, and will not be described again.
- the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application in the scenario where the terminal device performs cell reselection, on the basis that the quality of the existing candidate cells meets the first condition of the S criterion and the R criterion, is added for making the
- the second condition for dual cards to form DSDA mode is to optimize and improve the existing process with fewer changes. It is easier to implement when the terminal device can be in DSDA mode.
- the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell satisfies the event used for cell switching, and the event used for cell switching includes any one of A3 event, A4 event, B1 event or B2 event.
- the A3 event, the A4 event, the B1 event and the B2 event please refer to the relevant descriptions in the method 600 above, and will not be described again.
- the quality of the candidate cell may be represented by RSRP. It should be noted that the candidate cell here is a neighboring cell of the serving cell where the first card is camped.
- the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the implementation process of the above method 600.
- the first card can be one of card 1 and card 2 in the above method 600, and the second card can be the other card in the above method 600.
- the first candidate frequency band of the first card It may be the first candidate frequency band of one of the cards in the method 600.
- the dual-SIM communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application adds an additional function for making the cell switch happen on the basis that the quality of the existing candidate cells meets the first condition for the cell switch event in the scenario where the terminal device performs cell handover.
- the second condition for dual cards to form DSDA mode is to optimize and improve the existing process with fewer changes. It is easier to implement when the terminal device can be in DSDA mode.
- method 700 before parking the first card on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, method 700 further includes:
- the terminal device sends a measurement report indicating the target frequency band to the network device;
- both the first card and the second card have completed the frequency band parking.
- the frequency band of the first card needs to be adjusted. Therefore, in these two scenarios, the first card is camped on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, including:
- the frequency band of the first card is adjusted so that the first card resides on the target frequency band.
- Figure 8 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method 800 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the method 800 can be executed by a terminal device that supports dual-SIM communication or by a chip in the terminal device.
- the embodiments of this application do not impose any limitations.
- method 800 will be described in detail by taking a terminal device as an example.
- Method 800 describes that when the terminal device performs cell reselection, it adjusts the frequency bands of the first card and the second card so that a DSDA mode is formed between the first card and the second card, which can correspond to the above method 500.
- the first card can be one of the main card and the secondary card
- the second card can be the other card of the main card and the secondary card.
- the terminal device determines the candidate frequency band of the first card that satisfies the first preset condition and the candidate frequency band that satisfies the second preset condition. Assuming that the candidate frequency band of the second card is conditional, the candidate frequency band of the first card includes at least one frequency band, the candidate frequency band of the second card includes at least one frequency band, and the first preset condition includes: for the candidate of the first card The cell satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion.
- the second preset condition includes: the candidate cell for the second card satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band.
- the candidate cell of the first card is a neighboring cell of the serving cell where the first card is camped
- the candidate cell of the second card is a neighboring cell of the serving cell where the second card is camped.
- the terminal device will first determine whether a DSDA mode is formed between the first card and the second card. If the DSDA mode is not formed, the terminal device will separately compare multiple candidate cells of the first card and multiple candidates of the second card. Cells are measured. One candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band. Based on all the frequency bands corresponding to multiple candidate cells of the first card, the candidate frequency band of the first card that meets the first preset condition is determined. According to the multiple candidate cells of the second card, the candidate frequency band is determined. All frequency bands determine candidate frequency bands of the second card that meet the second preset condition.
- the candidate frequency band of the first card here corresponds to the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 in the above method 500
- the candidate frequency band of the second card here corresponds to the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 in the above method 500.
- the following is about the two. The explanation of the relationship is the same as here and will not be repeated.
- the terminal device determines from the candidate frequency band of the first card and the candidate frequency band of the second card that the terminal device supports at least one DSDA combination that can form a DSDA mode, and each DSDA combination includes the first card's candidate frequency band.
- the candidate frequency bands and one of the candidate frequency bands of the second card are selected from the candidate frequency band of the first card and the candidate frequency band of the second card.
- the terminal device may determine, based on the DSDA mode information of the terminal device, whether at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device can be formed between the candidate frequency band of the first card and the candidate frequency band of the second card. If the candidate frequency bands of the two cards can form at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device, which means that the dual cards have the opportunity to form a DSDA mode, then execute SS830; if the candidate frequency bands of the two cards cannot form at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device. A DSDA combination ends the process.
- the terminal device determines the first card based on the target DSDA combination in the at least one DSDA combination.
- the frequency bands of the first card and the second card are adjusted so that the first card and the second card respectively reside on the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination.
- the terminal device determines the target DSDA combination from at least one DSDA combination, and adjusts the frequency band of the first card and the first card according to the target DSDA combination, that is, the first card and the first card are no longer resident.
- the frequency band is reselected to reside.
- the first card and the first card respectively reside in the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination.
- the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination are the frequency bands ultimately used for the first card to reside determined from the candidate frequency bands of the first card and the final frequency bands determined from the candidate frequency bands of the second card due to the third card.
- the target DSDA combination is this unique DSDA combination. If at least one DSDA combination is multiple DSDA combinations, the target DSDA combination is a DSDA combination among the multiple DSDA combinations.
- the target DSDA combination can be any DSDA combination among the multiple DSDA combinations, or it can be based on The DSDA combination determined by the rules is not limited here.
- the dual-card communication method determines the candidate frequency band of the first card based on the first preset condition and determines the candidate frequency band of the second card based on the second preset condition.
- the obtained candidate frequency bands of the two cards can both satisfy The S criterion and R criterion of the cell reselection process, and then freely combine the candidate frequency bands of the two cards to obtain at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal equipment and select one DSDA combination from at least one DSDA combination as the target DSDA, for the first Adjusting the frequency bands of the card and the second card can form a DSDA mode between the first card and the second card, thereby making the terminal device in the DSDA mode and improving the user experience.
- the at least one DSDA combination includes a plurality of DSDA combinations; and, before adjusting the frequency bands of the first card and the second card according to the target DSDA combination in the at least one DSDA combination, Method 800 also includes:
- the DSDA combination with the highest priority among the multiple DSDA combinations is determined as the target DSDA combination.
- the DSDA combination with the highest priority can be used as the target DSDA combination to adjust the frequency bands of the first card and the second card.
- the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card is the optimal mode set by the terminal device, which improves the performance of the dual-card mode.
- the DSDA combination with the highest priority is the combination with the best dual-SIM mode capability among the multiple DSDA combinations.
- This embodiment is to define the DSDA combination priority from the capability of dual-SIM mode.
- the capabilities of the dual-card mode from high to low are: DSDA transmitter exclusive > DSDA transmitter shared > DR-DSDS > DSDS.
- the priority of the DSDA combination from high to low can be: DSDA transmitter exclusive > DSDA transmitter shared > DR -DSDS>DSDS.
- the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application uses the combination with the best dual-card mode capability among multiple DSDA combinations as the DSDA combination with the highest priority, and the terminal device compares the first card to the first card based on the DSDA combination with the highest priority. Adjusting the frequency band of the second card can make the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card a dual-card mode with the best performance and the best user experience.
- the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is described in detail above with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8 .
- the terminal device provided according to the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9 to 10 .
- FIG. 9 is an exemplary block diagram of a terminal device 900 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the terminal device 900 includes a processing unit 910 .
- the terminal device 900 is used to execute various processes and steps corresponding to the terminal device in the above method 700.
- the processing unit 910 is configured to determine the first candidate frequency band of the first card that meets the preset conditions when the dual-card dual-pass DSDA mode is not formed between the first card and the second card of the terminal device, so
- the first candidate frequency band includes at least one frequency band
- the preset condition includes a first condition and a second condition.
- the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements
- the second condition includes: the frequency band of the candidate cell can The frequency band currently camped by the second card forms the DSDA mode supported by the terminal device, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band;
- the processing unit 910 is further configured to park the first card on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band.
- processing unit 910 may be used to perform various steps performed by the terminal device in the method 700. For specific descriptions, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions above, which will not be described again.
- the terminal device 900 is used to execute various processes and steps corresponding to the terminal device in the above method 800.
- the processing unit 910 is configured to determine the candidate frequency band of the first card that satisfies the first preset condition and the candidate frequency band of the first card that satisfies the first preset condition when the dual-card dual-pass DSDA mode is not formed between the first card and the second card of the terminal device.
- the candidate frequency band of the second card according to the second preset condition, the candidate frequency band of the first card includes at least one frequency band
- the candidate frequency band of the second card includes at least one frequency band
- the first preset condition includes: The candidate cell for the first card satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion
- the second preset condition includes: the candidate cell for the second card satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band;
- the processing unit 910 is further configured to determine, from the candidate frequency band of the first card and the candidate frequency band of the second card, at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device that can form a DSDA mode, and each DSDA combination includes the One frequency band among the candidate frequency bands of the first card and one frequency band among the candidate frequency bands of the second card;
- the processing unit 910 is also configured to adjust the frequency bands of the first card and the second card according to the target DSDA combination in the at least one DSDA combination, so that the first card and the second card respectively reside on the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination.
- processing unit 910 can be used to perform various steps performed by the terminal device in the method 800. For specific descriptions, reference can be made to the relevant descriptions above, which will not be described again.
- terminal device 900 here is embodied in the form of a functional unit.
- the term "unit” as used herein may refer to an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an electronic circuit, a processor (such as a shared processor, a proprietary processor, or a group of processors) used to execute one or more software or firmware programs. processor, etc.) and memory, merged logic circuitry, and/or other suitable components to support the described functionality.
- ASIC application specific integrated circuit
- processor such as a shared processor, a proprietary processor, or a group of processors
- memory merged logic circuitry, and/or other suitable components to support the described functionality.
- the terminal device in Figure 9 may also be a chip or a chip system, such as a system on chip (SoC).
- SoC system on chip
- Figure 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 1000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- Terminal equipment 1000 is used to execute Execute the corresponding steps and/or processes in the above method embodiments.
- the terminal device 1000 includes a processor 1010, a transceiver 1020, and a memory 1030. Among them, the processor 1010, the transceiver 1020 and the memory 1030 communicate with each other through internal connection paths.
- the processor 1010 can implement the functions of the processor 1010 in various possible implementations in the terminal device 1000.
- the memory 1030 is used to store instructions, and the processor 1010 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 1030. In other words, the processor 1010 can call these stored instructions to implement the functions of the processor 1010 in the terminal device 1000.
- the memory 1030 may include read-only memory and random access memory and provide instructions and data to the processor.
- a portion of the memory may also include non-volatile random access memory.
- the memory may also store device type information.
- the processor 1010 may be used to execute instructions stored in the memory, and when the processor 1010 executes the instructions stored in the memory, the processor 1010 is used to execute each step of the above method embodiment corresponding to the terminal device and/or process.
- the terminal device 1000 is configured to execute various processes and steps corresponding to the terminal device in the above method 700.
- Processor 1010 is used to perform the following steps:
- the preset condition includes a first condition and a second condition.
- the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements.
- the second condition includes: the frequency band of the candidate cell can be compatible with the second card. The frequency band currently camped on forms the DSDA mode supported by the terminal equipment, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band;
- the first card is camped on the target frequency band.
- the terminal device 900 is used to execute various processes and steps corresponding to the terminal device in the above method 800.
- Processor 1010 is used to perform the following steps:
- the candidate frequency band of the first card that satisfies the first preset condition and the candidate frequency band that satisfies the second preset condition.
- the candidate frequency band of the second card includes at least one frequency band
- the candidate frequency band of the second card includes at least one frequency band
- the first preset condition includes: for the first card
- the candidate cells of the second card satisfy the S criterion and the R criterion
- the second preset conditions include: the candidate cells of the second card satisfy the S criterion and the R criterion, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band;
- each DSDA combination including the candidate frequency band of the first card One of the frequency bands and one of the candidate frequency bands of the second card;
- the frequency bands of the first card and the second card are adjusted so that the first card and the second card respectively reside in the target On the frequency band corresponding to the dual cards in the DSDA combination.
- the processor of the above device may be a central processing unit (CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), Application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
- DSP digital signal processor
- ASICs Application specific integrated circuits
- FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
- a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor, etc.
- each step of the above method can be completed by instructions in the form of hardware integrated logic circuits or software in the processor.
- the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application can be directly implemented by a hardware processor for execution, or can be executed by a combination of hardware and software units in the processor.
- the software unit can be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other mature storage media in this field.
- the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor executes the instructions in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
- Embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product.
- the computer program product When the computer program product is run on a terminal device, it causes the terminal device to execute the technical solutions in the above embodiments.
- the implementation principles and technical effects are similar to the above-mentioned method-related embodiments, and will not be described again here.
- Embodiments of the present application provide a readable storage medium.
- the readable storage medium contains instructions.
- the instructions When the instructions are run on a terminal device, the terminal device executes the technical solutions of the above embodiments.
- the implementation principles and technical effects are similar and will not be described again here.
- Embodiments of the present application provide a chip.
- the chip is used to execute instructions.
- the technical solutions in the above embodiments are executed.
- the implementation principles and technical effects are similar and will not be described again here.
- the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
- the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
- the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another, e.g., the computer instructions may be transferred from a website, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
- the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that contains one or more available media integrated.
- the usable media may be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (e.g., high-density digital video discs (DVD)), or semiconductor media (e.g., solid state disks, SSD)) etc.
- magnetic media e.g., floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes
- optical media e.g., high-density digital video discs (DVD)
- DVD digital video discs
- semiconductor media e.g., solid state disks, SSD
- an embodiment means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic associated with the embodiment is included in at least one embodiment of the present application. Therefore, various embodiments are not necessarily referred to the same embodiment throughout this specification. Furthermore, the particular features, structures or characteristics may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. It should be understood that in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
- a and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and they exist alone. In the three cases B, A can be singular or plural, and B can be singular or plural.
- At least one of! or "at least one of" herein refers to all or any combination of the listed items, for example, "at least one of A, B and C", It can mean: A exists alone, B exists alone, C exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, B and C exist at the same time, A, B and C exist at the same time, among which A can be singular or plural, and B can be Singular or plural, C can be singular or plural.
- the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
- the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
- multiple units or components may be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
- the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of the devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
- each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into one processing unit, each unit can exist physically alone, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
- the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
- the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product.
- the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of this application.
- the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code. .
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
- Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Embodiments of the present application provide a dual-card communication method and a terminal device, the method comprising: the terminal device reserves a frequency band where a second card currently resides, determines a first candidate frequency band of the first card on the basis of a preset condition, obtains the first candidate frequency band that both meets the quality requirement and forms a DSDA mode with the frequency band where the second card currently resides, then selects one frequency band from the first candidate frequency band as a target frequency band, and thus enables the first card to reside on the target frequency band and forms a DSDA mode between the first card and the second card. Therefore, the terminal device can be in the DSDA mode, and the user experience is improved.
Description
本申请要求于2022年5月30日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202210601045.9、申请名称为“一种双卡通信的方法和终端设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office on May 30, 2022, with application number 202210601045.9 and the application title "A method and terminal equipment for dual-card communication", the entire content of which is incorporated by reference. in this application.
本申请涉及通信领域,更具体地,涉及通信领域中一种双卡通信的方法和终端设备。The present application relates to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method and terminal device for dual-card communication in the field of communications.
随着通信的发展,目前的终端设备(例如,手机)大部分都支持双卡双待(dual sim dual standby,DSDS)或双卡双通(dual sin dual active,DSDA)模式。在DSDA模式下,终端设备支持双卡的业务并发,即双卡可实现同时发送或接收,一个卡执行通话业务时,另一个卡可以收到来电,也可以执行数据业务(即上网)。在DSDS模式下,终端设备不支持双卡业务并发,一个卡执行通话业务时,另一个卡无法进行数据业务,以及,一个卡执行数据业务时,另一个卡虽然可以接收来电,但来电会打断数据业务,对于主卡来讲,副卡的通话业务使得主卡无法进行数据业务,而且,副卡由于搜网、测量、跟踪区更新(tracking area update,TAU)、短信、彩信、周期性注册等行为会抢占天线,影响主卡的上网体验。With the development of communications, most current terminal devices (for example, mobile phones) support dual sim dual standby (DSDS) or dual sim dual active (dual sin dual active, DSDA) mode. In DSDA mode, the terminal device supports dual-card service concurrency, that is, dual cards can send or receive at the same time. When one card performs call services, the other card can receive incoming calls and perform data services (i.e., surf the Internet). In DSDS mode, the terminal device does not support concurrent dual-card services. When one card performs call services, the other card cannot perform data services. Also, when one card performs data services, although the other card can receive incoming calls, the incoming calls will not be made. For the primary card, the call service of the secondary card makes it impossible for the primary card to perform data services. Moreover, the secondary card is unable to perform data services due to network search, measurement, tracking area update (TAU), SMS, MMS, periodic Registration and other behaviors will seize the antenna and affect the Internet experience of the main card.
可以看出,相比于DSDS模式,DSDA模式的用户体验更高。但是,目前市场上终端设备中主流的芯片对DSDA模式的支持是不完善的,很多场景下终端设备都处于DSDS模式而非处于DSDA模式,由此降低了用户体验。It can be seen that compared to DSDS mode, DSDA mode has a higher user experience. However, the current mainstream chips in terminal equipment on the market do not have perfect support for DSDA mode. In many scenarios, terminal equipment is in DSDS mode instead of DSDA mode, thus reducing the user experience.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种双卡通信的方法和终端设备,能够使得终端设备尽可能处于DSDA模式,以提高用户体验。Embodiments of the present application provide a dual-SIM communication method and terminal equipment, which can make the terminal equipment in DSDA mode as much as possible to improve user experience.
第一方面,提供了一种双卡通信的方法,应用于终端设备中,包括:The first aspect provides a dual-card communication method, which is applied to terminal equipment, including:
在所述终端设备的第一卡和第二卡间未形成双卡双通DSDA模式的情况下,确定满足预设条件的所述第一卡的第一候选频段,所述第一候选频段包括至少一个频段,所述预设条件包括第一条件和第二条件,所述第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足要求,所述第二条件包括:候选小区的频段能够和所述第二卡当前驻留的频段形成所述终端设备支持的DSDA模式,一个候选小区对应一个频段;When the dual-card dual-pass DSDA mode is not formed between the first card and the second card of the terminal device, determine the first candidate frequency band of the first card that meets the preset conditions, and the first candidate frequency band includes At least one frequency band, the preset condition includes a first condition and a second condition. The first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements. The second condition includes: the frequency band of the candidate cell can be compatible with the second card. The frequency band currently camped on forms the DSDA mode supported by the terminal equipment, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band;
根据所述第一候选频段中的目标频段,将所述第一卡驻留在所述目标频段上。According to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, the first card is camped on the target frequency band.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,保留第二卡当前驻留的频段,基于预设条件确定第一卡的第一候选频段,得到的第一候选频段既能满足质量要求也能和第二卡当前驻留的频段形成DSDA模式,进而从第一候选频段中选择一个频段作为目标频段,
促使第一卡驻留在目标频段上,可以使得第一卡和第二卡间形成DSDA模式,从而,能够使得终端设备处于DSDA模式,提高了用户体验。此外,由于本申请实施例保留了第二卡当前驻留的频段仅干涉了第一卡需要驻留的频段,相比于对两个卡的频段均需进行调整的方式,本申请实施例更易实现,且一定程度上降低了由于调整频段可能导致的业务中断给用户带来的影响。The dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application retains the frequency band currently occupied by the second card, and determines the first candidate frequency band of the first card based on preset conditions. The obtained first candidate frequency band can not only meet the quality requirements but also be compatible with The frequency band currently occupied by the second card forms the DSDA mode, and then selects a frequency band from the first candidate frequency band as the target frequency band. Prompting the first card to reside on the target frequency band can cause a DSDA mode to be formed between the first card and the second card, thereby enabling the terminal device to be in the DSDA mode and improving user experience. In addition, since the embodiment of the present application retains the frequency band where the second card currently resides and only interferes with the frequency band where the first card needs to reside, compared with the method of adjusting the frequency bands of both cards, the embodiment of the present application is easier Realize, and reduce to a certain extent the impact on users of service interruptions that may be caused by adjusting the frequency band.
可选地,所述第一候选频段包括多个频段;以及,在所述根据所述第一候选频段中的目标频段,将所述第一卡驻留在所述目标频段上之前,所述方法还包括:Optionally, the first candidate frequency band includes a plurality of frequency bands; and, before the first card is camped on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, the Methods also include:
将所述第一候选频段中优先级最高的频段确定为所述目标频段。The frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands is determined as the target frequency band.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,若基于预设条件确定的第一候选频段包括多个频段,终端设备将第一候选频段中优先级最高的频段作为目标频段,保留第二卡当前驻留的频段,将第一卡驻留在该目标频段上,能够使得第一卡和第二卡之间形成的DSDA模式是终端设备设定的最优模式,提高了双卡模式的性能。In the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application, if the first candidate frequency band determined based on preset conditions includes multiple frequency bands, the terminal device uses the frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands as the target frequency band, and retains the current frequency band of the second card. Parking the first card in the target frequency band can make the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card the optimal mode set by the terminal device, improving the performance of the dual-card mode.
可选地,所述优先级最高的频段是所述第一候选频段中与所述第二卡当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段。Optionally, the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where the second card currently resides.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,终端设备通过将第一候选频段中与第二卡当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段作为优先级最高的频段,保留第二卡当前驻留的频段,将第一卡驻留在该优先级最高的频段上,能够使得第一卡和第二卡之间形成的DSDA模式是性能最优的双卡模式,用户的体验最好。In the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device uses the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where the second card currently resides as the frequency band with the highest priority. , retaining the frequency band where the second card currently resides, and parking the first card on the frequency band with the highest priority, can make the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card a dual-card mode with the best performance. User experience is the best.
可选地,所述优先级最高的频段是所述第一候选频段中信号最强的频段。Optionally, the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands.
可选地,在所述终端设备进行开机选小区的场景中,所述第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足S准则。Optionally, in a scenario where the terminal device performs cell selection at power-on, the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell satisfies the S criterion.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,在终端设备进行开机选小区的场景中,在现有的候选小区的质量满足S准则的第一条件的基础上,增加了用于使得双卡形成DSDA模式的第二条件,对现有流程做了优化改进,改动较少,在能够使得终端设备处于DSDA模式的情况下,更易于实现。The dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application, in the scenario where the terminal device is powered on to select a cell, on the basis that the quality of the existing candidate cells meets the first condition of the S criterion, an additional feature is added to enable dual-card formation. The second condition of DSDA mode is to optimize and improve the existing process with fewer changes. It is easier to implement when the terminal equipment can be placed in DSDA mode.
可选地,在所述终端设备进行小区重选的场景中,所述第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足S准则和R准则。Optionally, in the scenario where the terminal device performs cell reselection, the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,在终端设备进行小区重选的场景中,在现有的候选小区的质量满足S准则和R准则的第一条件的基础上,增加了用于使得双卡形成DSDA模式的第二条件,对现有流程做了优化改进,改动较少,在能够使得终端设备处于DSDA模式的情况下,更易于实现。The dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application, in the scenario where the terminal device performs cell reselection, on the basis that the quality of the existing candidate cells meets the first condition of the S criterion and the R criterion, is added for making the The second condition for dual cards to form DSDA mode is to optimize and improve the existing process with fewer changes. It is easier to implement when the terminal device can be in DSDA mode.
可选地,在所述终端设备进行小区切换的场景中,所述第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足用于小区切换的事件,所述用于小区切换的事件包括A3事件、A4事件、B1事件或B2事件中任一个。Optionally, in the scenario where the terminal device performs cell switching, the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell meets the events used for cell switching, and the events used for cell switching include A3 events, A4 events, Either B1 event or B2 event.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,在终端设备进行小区切换的场景中,在现有的候选小区的质量满足用于小区切换的事件的第一条件的基础上,增加了用于使得双卡形成DSDA模式的第二条件,对现有流程做了优化改进,改动较少,在能够使得终端设备处于DSDA模式的情况下,更易于实现。The dual-SIM communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application adds an additional function for making the cell switch happen on the basis that the quality of the existing candidate cells meets the first condition for the cell switch event in the scenario where the terminal device performs cell handover. The second condition for dual cards to form DSDA mode is to optimize and improve the existing process with fewer changes. It is easier to implement when the terminal device can be in DSDA mode.
可选地,所述根据所述第一候选频段中的目标频段,将所述第一卡驻留在所述目标
频段上之前,所述方法还包括:Optionally, based on the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, the first card is stationed in the target frequency band. Before going on the frequency band, the method also includes:
向网络设备发送用于指示所述目标频段的测量报告;Send a measurement report indicating the target frequency band to the network device;
接收来自所述网络设备的切换指示,所述切换指示用于指示所述终端设备将所述第一卡驻留的频段切换至所述目标频段上。Receive a switching instruction from the network device, where the switching instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch the frequency band where the first card resides to the target frequency band.
可选地,所述根据所述第一候选频段中的目标频段,将所述第一卡驻留在所述目标频段上,包括:Optionally, the step of parking the first card on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band includes:
根据所述目标频段,对所述第一卡的频段进行调整,以使得所述第一卡驻留在所述目标频段上。According to the target frequency band, the frequency band of the first card is adjusted so that the first card resides on the target frequency band.
可选地,所述第一卡为副卡,所述第二卡为主卡。Optionally, the first card is a secondary card, and the second card is a primary card.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,由于主卡的使用率更高,一般会进行更多的电话业务和上网业务,保留主卡的频段,对副卡进行调整,可以减少由于调整频段对主卡的业务造成的影响,以尽可能保证主卡业务的顺畅,用户可以享受到最佳体验。In the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application, since the main card has a higher usage rate and generally conducts more phone services and Internet services, retaining the frequency band of the main card and adjusting the secondary card can reduce the need to adjust the frequency band. The impact on the main card's business is to ensure that the main card's business is as smooth as possible and users can enjoy the best experience.
第二方面,提供一种双卡通信的方法,应用于终端设备中,包括:In the second aspect, a dual-card communication method is provided and applied to terminal equipment, including:
在所述终端设备的第一卡和第二卡间未形成双卡双通DSDA模式的情况下,确定满足第一预设条件的所述第一卡的候选频段和满足第二预设条件的所述第二卡的候选频段,所述第一卡的候选频段包括至少一个频段,所述第二卡的候选频段包括至少一个频段,所述第一预设条件包括:针对所述第一卡的候选小区满足S准则和R准则,所述第二预设条件包括:针对所述第二卡的候选小区满足S准则和R准则,一个候选小区对应一个频段;When the dual-card dual-pass DSDA mode is not formed between the first card and the second card of the terminal device, determine the candidate frequency band of the first card that satisfies the first preset condition and the candidate frequency band that satisfies the second preset condition. The candidate frequency band of the second card includes at least one frequency band, the candidate frequency band of the second card includes at least one frequency band, and the first preset condition includes: for the first card The candidate cells of the second card satisfy the S criterion and the R criterion, and the second preset conditions include: the candidate cells of the second card satisfy the S criterion and the R criterion, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band;
从所述第一卡的候选频段和所述第二卡的候选频段中,确定所述终端设备支持的能够形成DSDA模式的至少一个DSDA组合,每个DSDA组合包括所述第一卡的候选频段中的一个频段和所述第二卡的候选频段中的一个频段;Determine at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device that can form a DSDA mode from the candidate frequency band of the first card and the candidate frequency band of the second card, each DSDA combination including the candidate frequency band of the first card One of the frequency bands and one of the candidate frequency bands of the second card;
根据所述至少一个DSDA组合中的目标DSDA组合,对所述第一卡和所述第二卡的频段进行调整,以使得所述第一卡和所述第二卡分别驻留在所述目标DSDA组合中双卡对应的频段上。According to the target DSDA combination in the at least one DSDA combination, the frequency bands of the first card and the second card are adjusted so that the first card and the second card respectively reside in the target On the frequency band corresponding to the dual cards in the DSDA combination.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,基于第一预设条件确定第一卡的候选频段以及第二预设条件确定第二卡的候选频段,得到的两个卡的候选频段均能满足小区重选过程的S准则和R准则,进而对两个卡的候选频段进行自由组合以得到确定终端设备支持的至少一个DSDA组合以及从至少一个DSDA组合选择一个DSDA组合作为目标DSDA,对第一卡和第二卡的频段进行调整,可以使得第一卡和第二卡间形成DSDA模式,从而,能够使得终端设备处于DSDA模式,提高了用户体验。The dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application determines the candidate frequency band of the first card based on the first preset condition and determines the candidate frequency band of the second card based on the second preset condition. The obtained candidate frequency bands of the two cards can both satisfy The S criterion and R criterion of the cell reselection process, and then freely combine the candidate frequency bands of the two cards to obtain at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal equipment and select one DSDA combination from at least one DSDA combination as the target DSDA, for the first Adjusting the frequency bands of the card and the second card can form a DSDA mode between the first card and the second card, thereby making the terminal device in the DSDA mode and improving the user experience.
可选地,所述至少一个DSDA组合包括多个DSDA组合;以及,在所述根据所述至少一个DSDA组合中的目标DSDA组合,对所述第一卡和所述第二卡的频段进行调整之前,所述方法还包括:Optionally, the at least one DSDA combination includes a plurality of DSDA combinations; and, adjusting the frequency bands of the first card and the second card according to the target DSDA combination in the at least one DSDA combination. Previously, the method also included:
将所述多个DSDA组合中优先级最高的DSDA组合确定为所述目标DSDA组合。The DSDA combination with the highest priority among the plurality of DSDA combinations is determined as the target DSDA combination.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,若终端设备支持的DSDA组合有多个,可以将优先级最高的DSDA组合作为目标DSDA组合,以对第一卡和第二卡的频段进行调整,能够使得第一卡和第二卡之间形成的DSDA模式是终端设备设定的最优模式,提高了双卡模式的性能。
In the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of this application, if the terminal device supports multiple DSDA combinations, the DSDA combination with the highest priority can be used as the target DSDA combination to adjust the frequency bands of the first card and the second card. The DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card is the optimal mode set by the terminal device, which improves the performance of the dual-card mode.
可选地,所述优先级最高的DSDA组合是所述多个DSDA组合中双卡模式的能力最好的组合。Optionally, the DSDA combination with the highest priority is the combination with the best dual-SIM mode capability among the multiple DSDA combinations.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,通过将多个DSDA组合中双卡模式的能力最好的组合作为优先级最高的DSDA组合,终端设备根据该优先级最高的DSDA组合对第一卡和第二卡的频段进行调整,能够使得第一卡和第二卡之间形成的DSDA模式是性能最优的双卡模式,用户的体验最好。The dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application uses the combination with the best dual-card mode capability among multiple DSDA combinations as the DSDA combination with the highest priority, and the terminal device compares the first card to the first card based on the DSDA combination with the highest priority. Adjusting the frequency band of the second card can make the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card a dual-card mode with the best performance and the best user experience.
第三方面,提供一种终端设备,所述终端设备用于执行上述第一方面或第二方面提供的方法。具体地,所述终端设备可以包括用于执行上述第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式的模块。A third aspect provides a terminal device, which is configured to execute the method provided in the first or second aspect. Specifically, the terminal device may include a module for executing any possible implementation of the first aspect or the second aspect.
第四方面,提供一种终端设备,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该终端设备还包括存储器。可选地,该装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。A fourth aspect provides a terminal device including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any of the possible implementations of the first aspect or the second aspect. Optionally, the terminal device further includes a memory. Optionally, the device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
第五方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被装置执行时,使得所述装置实现上述第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a fifth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, with a computer program stored thereon. When the computer program is executed by a device, it causes the device to implement any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect or the second aspect. Methods.
第六方面,提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,所述指令被计算机执行时使得装置实现上述第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。A sixth aspect provides a computer program product containing instructions that, when executed by a computer, cause a device to implement the method in any of the possible implementations of the first aspect or the second aspect.
第七方面,提供一种芯片,包括:输入接口、输出接口、处理器和存储器,所述输入接口、输出接口、所述处理器以及所述存储器之间通过内部连接通路相连,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中的代码,当所述代码被执行时,所述处理器用于执行上述第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, a chip is provided, including: an input interface, an output interface, a processor, and a memory. The input interface, the output interface, the processor, and the memory are connected through an internal connection path. The processor uses For executing the code in the memory, when the code is executed, the processor is configured to execute the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect or the second aspect.
图1是本申请实施例提供的移动通信系统的示意性结构图。Figure 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a mobile communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图2是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图。Figure 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图3是本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法的示意性流程图。Figure 3 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图4是本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法的另一示意性流程图。FIG. 4 is another schematic flow chart of the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图5是本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法的另一示意性流程图。FIG. 5 is another schematic flow chart of the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图6是本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法的另一示意性流程图。FIG. 6 is another schematic flow chart of the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图7是本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法的另一示意性流程图。FIG. 7 is another schematic flow chart of the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图8是本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法的另一示意性流程图。FIG. 8 is another schematic flow chart of the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图9是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的示例性框图。Figure 9 is an exemplary block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图10本申请实施例提供的终端设备的示意性结构图。Figure 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in this application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案适用于能够与网络设备通信且支持双卡通信的终端设备,每
个卡均可支持电话业务和数据业务(即,上网业务),例如,终端设备可以是手机、智能手表、智能手环或平板电脑等,本申请实施例对终端设备的具体类型不做任何限制。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application are applicable to terminal devices that can communicate with network devices and support dual-card communication. Each card can support telephone services and data services (i.e., Internet access services). For example, the terminal device can be a mobile phone, a smart watch, a smart bracelet, or a tablet computer. The embodiments of this application do not place any restrictions on the specific types of terminal devices. .
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通讯(global system for mobile communications,GSM)系统,通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS)系统,码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA)系统,宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)系统,时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、第五代新无线(5th generation new radio,5G NR)或未来的第六代(6th generation,6G)系统等,其中,5G NR简称NR。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: global system for mobile communications (GSM) system, general packet radio service (GPRS) system, code division multiple access Into (code division multiple access, CDMA) system, wideband code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA) system, time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long-term evolution (long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (TDD), fifth generation new radio (5G NR) or future The sixth generation (6th generation, 6G) system, etc., among which, 5G NR is referred to as NR.
本申请实施例适用于包括多个基站和至少一个终端设备的移动通信系统中,其中,多个基站中至少包括能够支持5G网络的基站和能够支持4G网络的基站。示例性地,如图1所示,移动通信系统包括基站110、基站120和终端设备130,基站110和基站120中的一个能够支持4G网络,另一个能够支持5G网络,终端设备130可与基站110和基站120中的至少一个连接。为了便于描述,将支持4G网络的基站简称为4G基站,将支持5G网络的基站简称为5G基站。The embodiments of the present application are applicable to a mobile communication system including multiple base stations and at least one terminal device, where the multiple base stations include at least a base station capable of supporting a 5G network and a base station capable of supporting a 4G network. For example, as shown in Figure 1, the mobile communication system includes a base station 110, a base station 120 and a terminal device 130. One of the base station 110 and the base station 120 can support a 4G network, and the other can support a 5G network. The terminal device 130 can communicate with the base station. 110 is connected to at least one of the base stations 120. For ease of description, the base station that supports the 4G network will be referred to as the 4G base station, and the base station that supports the 5G network will be referred to as the 5G base station.
若终端设备130与基站110和基站120中的一个连接时,双卡均驻留在同一网络(4G网络或5G网络)。若终端设备130均与基站110和基站120连接,那么,可能有以下3种情况。情况1、终端设备支持4G网络和5G网络的双连接,以及,两个卡中的每个卡均处于双连接状态,即,每个卡同时连接4G网络和5G网络。情况2、一个卡驻留在4G网络,另一个卡驻留在5G网络。情况3、终端设备支持LTE网络和5G网络的双连接,一个卡驻留在4G网络或5G网络,另一个卡同时连接4G网络和5G网络。If the terminal device 130 is connected to one of the base station 110 and the base station 120, both cards reside on the same network (4G network or 5G network). If the terminal device 130 is connected to the base station 110 and the base station 120, then the following three situations may occur. Case 1: The terminal device supports dual connection of the 4G network and the 5G network, and each of the two cards is in a dual connection state, that is, each card is connected to the 4G network and the 5G network at the same time. Scenario 2. One card resides in the 4G network and the other card resides in the 5G network. Case 3: The terminal device supports dual connections of the LTE network and the 5G network. One card resides on the 4G network or 5G network, and the other card is connected to both the 4G network and the 5G network at the same time.
需要说明的是,由于双卡并不一定支持同一个运营商,所以,当双卡同时驻留在4G网络或5G网络时,双卡驻留的4G基站或5G基站可能并不相同,因此,移动通信系统中可能包括多个基站110和/或多个基站120。当某个基站(例如,基站110或基站120)为共享网络的基站时,即使双卡不支持同一个运营商,系统依然允许双卡驻留在该基站支持的网络中,其中,共享网络为不同运营商共享的网络。It should be noted that since dual SIM cards do not necessarily support the same operator, when dual SIM cards reside on the 4G network or 5G network at the same time, the 4G base station or 5G base station where the dual SIM cards reside may not be the same. Therefore, The mobile communication system may include multiple base stations 110 and/or multiple base stations 120 . When a certain base station (for example, base station 110 or base station 120) is a base station of a shared network, even if the dual cards do not support the same operator, the system still allows the dual cards to reside in the network supported by the base station, where the shared network is Networks shared by different operators.
假设,双卡支持不同的运营商,卡1支持运营商1,卡2支持运营商2,移动通信系统中包括一个基站110和两个基站120。Assume that the dual cards support different operators, card 1 supports operator 1, and card 2 supports operator 2. The mobile communication system includes one base station 110 and two base stations 120.
在一示例中,若基站110为共享4G网络的4G基站,基站120为非共享5G网络的5G基站,一个基站120支持运营商1,另一个基站120支持运营商2。若双卡同时驻留在4G网络,则双卡均驻留在同一个基站110(即,4G基站);若双卡同时驻留在5G网络,则双卡驻留在不同的基站120(即,5G基站)上,卡1驻留在运营商1对应的基站120上,卡2驻留在运营商2对应的基站120上。In an example, if the base station 110 is a 4G base station that shares a 4G network and the base station 120 is a 5G base station that does not share a 5G network, one base station 120 supports operator 1 and the other base station 120 supports operator 2. If the dual cards reside on the 4G network at the same time, the dual cards reside on the same base station 110 (i.e., 4G base station); if the dual cards reside on the 5G network at the same time, the dual cards reside on different base stations 120 (i.e., , 5G base station), card 1 resides on the base station 120 corresponding to operator 1, and card 2 resides on the base station 120 corresponding to operator 2.
在另一示例中,若基站110为共享5G网络的5G基站,基站120为非共享4G网络的4G基站,一个基站120支持运营商1,另一个基站120支持运营商2。若双卡同时驻留在5G网络,则双卡均驻留在同一个基站110(即,5G基站);若双卡同时驻留在4G网络,则双卡驻留在不同的基站120(即,4G基站)上,卡1驻留在运营
商1对应的基站120上,卡2驻留在运营商2对应的基站120上。In another example, if the base station 110 is a 5G base station that shares a 5G network and the base station 120 is a 4G base station that does not share a 4G network, one base station 120 supports operator 1 and the other base station 120 supports operator 2. If the dual cards reside on the 5G network at the same time, the dual cards reside on the same base station 110 (i.e., 5G base station); if the dual cards reside on the 4G network at the same time, the dual cards reside on different base stations 120 (i.e., , 4G base station), card 1 resides on the operating The card 2 resides on the base station 120 corresponding to the operator 1, and the card 2 resides on the base station 120 corresponding to the operator 2.
再假设,双卡支持不同的运营商,卡1支持运营商1,卡2支持运营商2,移动通信系统中包括两个基站110和两个基站120,基站110为非共享4G网络的4G基站,一个基站110支持运营商1,另一个基站110支持运营商2,基站120为非共享5G网络的5G基站,一个基站120支持运营商1,另一个基站120支持运营商2。若双卡同时驻留在4G网络,则双卡驻留在不同的基站110(即,4G基站)上,卡1驻留在运营商1对应的基站110上,卡2驻留在运营商2对应的基站110上;若双卡同时驻留在5G网络,则双卡驻留在不同的基站120(即,5G基站)上,卡1驻留在运营商1对应的基站120上,卡2驻留在运营商2对应的基站120上。Assume further that the dual cards support different operators, card 1 supports operator 1, and card 2 supports operator 2. The mobile communication system includes two base stations 110 and two base stations 120. The base station 110 is a 4G base station of a non-shared 4G network. , one base station 110 supports operator 1, and the other base station 110 supports operator 2. The base station 120 is a 5G base station of a non-shared 5G network. One base station 120 supports operator 1, and the other base station 120 supports operator 2. If dual SIM cards are camped on the 4G network at the same time, then the dual SIM cards are camped on different base stations 110 (i.e., 4G base stations). Card 1 is camped on the base station 110 corresponding to operator 1, and card 2 is camped on operator 2. on the corresponding base station 110; if the dual cards reside on the 5G network at the same time, the dual cards reside on different base stations 120 (i.e., 5G base stations). Card 1 resides on the base station 120 corresponding to operator 1, and card 2 It resides on the base station 120 corresponding to operator 2.
应理解,图1示出的移动通信系统仅为示意性说明,不应对本申请实施例构成限定。例如,移动通信系统中还可以包括核心网设备,以及,更多的基站和终端设备等。It should be understood that the mobile communication system shown in Figure 1 is only a schematic illustration and should not limit the embodiments of the present application. For example, the mobile communication system may also include core network equipment, as well as more base stations and terminal equipment.
图2示出了终端设备200的结构示意图。终端设备200可以包括处理器210,外部存储器接口220,内部存储器221,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口230,充电管理模块240,电源管理模块241,电池242,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块250,无线通信模块260,音频模块270,扬声器270A,受话器270B,麦克风270C,耳机接口270D,传感器模块280,按键290,马达291,指示器292,摄像头293,显示屏294,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口295等。其中传感器模块280可以包括压力传感器280A,陀螺仪传感器280B,气压传感器280C,磁传感器280D,加速度传感器280E,距离传感器280F,接近光传感器280G,指纹传感器280H,温度传感器280J,触摸传感器280K,环境光传感器280L,骨传导传感器280M等。Figure 2 shows a schematic structural diagram of the terminal device 200. The terminal device 200 may include a processor 210, an external memory interface 220, an internal memory 221, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 230, a charging management module 240, a power management module 241, a battery 242, an antenna 1, an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 250, wireless communication module 260, audio module 270, speaker 270A, receiver 270B, microphone 270C, headphone interface 270D, sensor module 280, button 290, motor 291, indicator 292, camera 293, display screen 294, and Subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 295, etc. The sensor module 280 may include a pressure sensor 280A, a gyro sensor 280B, an air pressure sensor 280C, a magnetic sensor 280D, an acceleration sensor 280E, a distance sensor 280F, a proximity light sensor 280G, a fingerprint sensor 280H, a temperature sensor 280J, a touch sensor 280K, and ambient light. Sensor 280L, bone conduction sensor 280M, etc.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例示意的结构并不构成对终端设备200的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,终端设备200可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present application does not constitute a specific limitation on the terminal device 200. In other embodiments of the present application, the terminal device 200 may include more or less components than shown in the figures, or combine some components, or split some components, or arrange different components. The components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器210可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器210可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 210 may include one or more processing units. For example, the processor 210 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) wait. Among them, different processing units can be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
其中,控制器可以是终端设备200的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller may be the nerve center and command center of the terminal device 200 . The controller can generate operation control signals based on the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
处理器210中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器210中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器210刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器210需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器210的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。The processor 210 may also be provided with a memory for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in processor 210 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have been recently used or recycled by processor 210 . If the processor 210 needs to use the instructions or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided and the waiting time of the processor 210 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
在一些实施例中,处理器210可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)
接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, processor 210 may include one or more interfaces. Interfaces may include integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) Interface, pulse code modulation (PCM) interface, universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), universal input and output (general- purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and/or universal serial bus (USB) interface, etc.
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线,包括一根串行数据线(serial data line,SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line,SCL)。在一些实施例中,处理器210可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器210可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器280K,充电器,闪光灯,摄像头293等。例如:处理器210可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器280K,使处理器210与触摸传感器280K通过I2C总线接口通信,实现终端设备200的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL). In some embodiments, processor 210 may include multiple sets of I2C buses. The processor 210 can couple the touch sensor 280K, the charger, the flash, the camera 293, etc. respectively through different I2C bus interfaces. For example, the processor 210 can be coupled to the touch sensor 280K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 210 and the touch sensor 280K communicate through the I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the terminal device 200 .
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中,处理器210可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器210可以通过I2S总线与音频模块270耦合,实现处理器210与音频模块270之间的通信。在一些实施例中,音频模块270可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块260传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. In some embodiments, processor 210 may include multiple sets of I2S buses. The processor 210 can be coupled with the audio module 270 through the I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 210 and the audio module 270. In some embodiments, the audio module 270 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 260 through the I2S interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。在一些实施例中,音频模块270与无线通信模块260可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中,音频模块270也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块260传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。The PCM interface can also be used for audio communications to sample, quantize and encode analog signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 270 and the wireless communication module 260 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface. In some embodiments, the audio module 270 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 260 through the PCM interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器210与无线通信模块260。例如:处理器210通过UART接口与无线通信模块260中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中,音频模块270可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块260传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。The UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication. In some embodiments, a UART interface is typically used to connect the processor 210 and the wireless communication module 260 . For example: the processor 210 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 260 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function. In some embodiments, the audio module 270 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 260 through the UART interface to implement the function of playing music through the Bluetooth headset.
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器210与显示屏294,摄像头293等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface,CSI),显示屏串行接口(display serial interface,DSI)等。在一些实施例中,处理器210和摄像头293通过CSI接口通信,实现终端设备200的拍摄功能。处理器210和显示屏294通过DSI接口通信,实现终端设备200的显示功能。The MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 210 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 294 and the camera 293 . MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc. In some embodiments, the processor 210 and the camera 293 communicate through the CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the terminal device 200. The processor 210 and the display screen 294 communicate through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the terminal device 200.
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号,也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中,GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器210与摄像头293,显示屏294,无线通信模块260,音频模块270,传感器模块280等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口,I2S接口,UART接口,MIPI接口等。The GPIO interface can be configured through software. The GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal. In some embodiments, the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 210 with the camera 293, display screen 294, wireless communication module 260, audio module 270, sensor module 280, etc. The GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
USB接口230是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口230可以用于连接充电器为终端设备200充电,也可以用于终端设备200与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他终端设备,例如AR设备等。The USB interface 230 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc. The USB interface 230 can be used to connect a charger to charge the terminal device 200, and can also be used to transmit data between the terminal device 200 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other terminal devices, such as AR devices.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,
并不构成对终端设备200的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,终端设备200也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationships between the modules illustrated in the embodiments of this application are only schematic illustrations. It does not constitute a structural limitation on the terminal device 200. In other embodiments of the present application, the terminal device 200 may also adopt different interface connection methods in the above embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
充电管理模块240用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块240可以通过USB接口230接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块240可以通过终端设备200的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块240为电池242充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块241为终端设备供电。The charge management module 240 is used to receive charging input from the charger. Among them, the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 240 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 230 . In some wireless charging embodiments, the charging management module 240 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the terminal device 200 . While charging the battery 242, the charging management module 240 can also provide power to the terminal device through the power management module 241.
电源管理模块241用于连接电池242,充电管理模块240与处理器210。电源管理模块241接收电池242和/或充电管理模块240的输入,为处理器210,内部存储器221,外部存储器,显示屏294,摄像头293,和无线通信模块260等供电。电源管理模块241还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块241也可以设置于处理器210中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块241和充电管理模块240也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 241 is used to connect the battery 242, the charging management module 240 and the processor 210. The power management module 241 receives input from the battery 242 and/or the charging management module 240 and supplies power to the processor 210, internal memory 221, external memory, display screen 294, camera 293, wireless communication module 260, etc. The power management module 241 can also be used to monitor battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance) and other parameters. In some other embodiments, the power management module 241 may also be provided in the processor 210 . In other embodiments, the power management module 241 and the charging management module 240 may also be provided in the same device.
终端设备200的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块250,无线通信模块260,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the terminal device 200 can be implemented through the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 250, the wireless communication module 260, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。终端设备200中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in terminal device 200 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example: Antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless LAN. In other embodiments, antennas may be used in conjunction with tuning switches.
移动通信模块250可以提供应用在终端设备200上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块250可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块250可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块250还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块250的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器210中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块250的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器210的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 250 can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the terminal device 200 . The mobile communication module 250 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc. The mobile communication module 250 can receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, perform filtering, amplification and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 250 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 250 may be disposed in the processor 210 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 250 and at least part of the modules of the processor 210 may be provided in the same device.
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器270A,受话器270B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏294显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器210,与移动通信模块250或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。A modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Among them, the modulator is used to modulate the low-frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium-high frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. The demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. After the low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor, it is passed to the application processor. The application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to speaker 270A, receiver 270B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 294. In some embodiments, the modem processor may be a stand-alone device. In other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent of the processor 210 and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 250 or other functional modules.
无线通信模块260可以提供应用在终端设备200上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块260可以是集成至少一个通信处
理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块260经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器210。无线通信模块260还可以从处理器210接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 260 can provide applications on the terminal device 200 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) network), Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites. Wireless communication solutions such as global navigation satellite system (GNSS), frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR), etc. The wireless communication module 260 may be integrated with at least one communication unit one or more devices of the management module. The wireless communication module 260 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 210 . The wireless communication module 260 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 210, frequency modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
在一些实施例中,终端设备200的天线1和移动通信模块250耦合,天线2和无线通信模块260耦合,使得终端设备200可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS),准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the terminal device 200 is coupled to the mobile communication module 250, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 260, so that the terminal device 200 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc. The GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi) -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
终端设备200通过GPU,显示屏294,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏294和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器210可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The terminal device 200 implements the display function through the GPU, the display screen 294, and the application processor. The GPU is an image processing microprocessor and is connected to the display screen 294 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 210 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
显示屏294用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏294包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,终端设备200可以包括1个或N个显示屏294,N为大于1的正整数。The display screen 294 is used to display images, videos, etc. Display 294 includes a display panel. The display panel can use a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode). emitting diode (AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diode (QLED), etc. In some embodiments, the terminal device 200 may include 1 or N display screens 294, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
终端设备200可以通过ISP,摄像头293,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏294以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The terminal device 200 can implement the shooting function through the ISP, camera 293, video codec, GPU, display screen 294, application processor, etc.
ISP用于处理摄像头293反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度,肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头293中。The ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 293. For example, when taking a photo, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera sensor through the lens, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera sensor passes the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be provided in the camera 293.
摄像头293用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,终端设备200可以包括1个或N个摄像头293,N为大于1的正整数。
Camera 293 is used to capture still images or video. The object passes through the lens to produce an optical image that is projected onto the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then passes the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other format image signals. In some embodiments, the terminal device 200 may include 1 or N cameras 293, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当终端设备200在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the terminal device 200 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。终端设备200可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,终端设备200可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. The terminal device 200 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the terminal device 200 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现终端设备200的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。NPU is a neural network (NN) computing processor. By drawing on the structure of biological neural networks, such as the transmission mode between neurons in the human brain, it can quickly process input information and can continuously learn by itself. The NPU can realize intelligent cognitive applications of the terminal device 200, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, etc.
外部存储器接口220可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展终端设备200的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口220与处理器210通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 220 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the terminal device 200. The external memory card communicates with the processor 210 through the external memory interface 220 to implement the data storage function. Such as saving music, videos, etc. files in external memory card.
内部存储器221可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器210通过运行存储在内部存储器221的指令,从而执行终端设备200的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器221可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储终端设备200使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器221可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。Internal memory 221 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions. The processor 210 executes instructions stored in the internal memory 221 to execute various functional applications and data processing of the terminal device 200 . The internal memory 221 may include a program storage area and a data storage area. Among them, the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required for a function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.). The storage data area may store data created during use of the terminal device 200 (such as audio data, phone book, etc.). In addition, the internal memory 221 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), etc.
终端设备200可以通过音频模块270,扬声器270A,受话器270B,麦克风270C,耳机接口270D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The terminal device 200 can implement audio functions through the audio module 270, the speaker 270A, the receiver 270B, the microphone 270C, the headphone interface 270D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块270用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块270还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块270可以设置于处理器210中,或将音频模块270的部分功能模块设置于处理器210中。The audio module 270 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signals. Audio module 270 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 270 may be provided in the processor 210 , or some functional modules of the audio module 270 may be provided in the processor 210 .
扬声器270A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。终端设备200可以通过扬声器270A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。Speaker 270A, also called "speaker", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The terminal device 200 can listen to music through the speaker 270A, or listen to a hands-free call.
受话器270B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当终端设备200接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器270B靠近人耳接听语音。Receiver 270B, also called "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. When the terminal device 200 answers a call or a voice message, the voice can be heard by bringing the receiver 270B close to the human ear.
麦克风270C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风270C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风270C。终端设备200可以设置至少一个麦克风270C。在另一些实施例中,终端设备200可以设置两个麦克风270C,除了采集声音信号,还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中,终端设备200还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风270C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。Microphone 270C, also called "microphone" or "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can speak close to the microphone 270C with the human mouth and input the sound signal to the microphone 270C. The terminal device 200 may be provided with at least one microphone 270C. In other embodiments, the terminal device 200 may be provided with two microphones 270C, which in addition to collecting sound signals, may also implement a noise reduction function. In other embodiments, the terminal device 200 can also be equipped with three, four or more microphones 270C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and implement directional recording functions, etc.
耳机接口270D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口270D可以是USB接口230,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动终端设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,
美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The headphone interface 270D is used to connect wired headphones. The headphone interface 270D can be a USB interface 230 or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface. Cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
压力传感器280A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中,压力传感器280A可以设置于显示屏294。压力传感器280A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器280A,电极之间的电容改变。终端设备200根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏294,终端设备200根据压力传感器280A检测所述触摸操作强度。终端设备200也可以根据压力传感器280A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。The pressure sensor 280A is used to sense pressure signals and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals. In some embodiments, pressure sensor 280A may be disposed on display screen 294. There are many types of pressure sensors 280A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors, etc. A capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates of conductive material. When a force is applied to pressure sensor 280A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The terminal device 200 determines the intensity of the pressure based on the change in capacitance. When a touch operation is performed on the display screen 294, the terminal device 200 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 280A. The terminal device 200 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 280A. In some embodiments, touch operations acting on the same touch location but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
陀螺仪传感器280B可以用于确定终端设备200的运动姿态。在一些实施例中,可以通过陀螺仪传感器280B确定终端设备200围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器280B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器280B检测终端设备200抖动的角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消终端设备200的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器280B还可以用于导航,体感游戏场景。The gyro sensor 280B may be used to determine the motion posture of the terminal device 200 . In some embodiments, the angular velocity of the terminal device 200 about three axes (ie, x, y, and z axes) may be determined by the gyro sensor 280B. The gyro sensor 280B can be used for image stabilization. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 280B detects the angle at which the terminal device 200 shakes, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shake of the terminal device 200 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake. The gyro sensor 280B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory gaming scenarios.
气压传感器280C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,终端设备200通过气压传感器280C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。Air pressure sensor 280C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the terminal device 200 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 280C to assist positioning and navigation.
磁传感器280D包括霍尔传感器。终端设备200可以利用磁传感器280D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中,当终端设备200是翻盖机时,终端设备200可以根据磁传感器280D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。Magnetic sensor 280D includes a Hall sensor. The terminal device 200 may use the magnetic sensor 280D to detect the opening and closing of the flip leather case. In some embodiments, when the terminal device 200 is a flip machine, the terminal device 200 may detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 280D. Then, based on the detected opening and closing status of the leather case or the opening and closing status of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
加速度传感器280E可检测终端设备200在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当终端设备200静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别终端设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 280E can detect the acceleration of the terminal device 200 in various directions (generally three axes). When the terminal device 200 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of terminal devices and be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
距离传感器280F,用于测量距离。终端设备200可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,终端设备200可以利用距离传感器280F测距以实现快速对焦。Distance sensor 280F, used to measure distance. The terminal device 200 can measure distance through infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the terminal device 200 can use the distance sensor 280F to measure distance to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器280G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。终端设备200通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。终端设备200使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定终端设备200附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,终端设备200可以确定终端设备200附近没有物体。终端设备200可以利用接近光传感器280G检测用户手持终端设备200贴近耳朵通话,以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器280G也可用于皮套模式,口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。Proximity light sensor 280G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode. The light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode. The terminal device 200 emits infrared light through a light emitting diode. The terminal device 200 detects infrared reflected light from nearby objects using photodiodes. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the terminal device 200 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the terminal device 200 may determine that there is no object near the terminal device 200 . The terminal device 200 can use the proximity light sensor 280G to detect when the user holds the terminal device 200 close to the ear for talking, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power. The proximity light sensor 280G can also be used in holster mode, and pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
环境光传感器280L用于感知环境光亮度。终端设备200可以根据感知的环境光亮
度自适应调节显示屏294亮度。环境光传感器280L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器280L还可以与接近光传感器280G配合,检测终端设备200是否在口袋里,以防误触。The ambient light sensor 280L is used to sense ambient light brightness. The terminal device 200 can illuminate according to the perceived ambient light. Adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 294 degrees. The ambient light sensor 280L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures. The ambient light sensor 280L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 280G to detect whether the terminal device 200 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touching.
指纹传感器280H用于采集指纹。终端设备200可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。Fingerprint sensor 280H is used to collect fingerprints. The terminal device 200 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, access application lock, fingerprint photography, fingerprint answering incoming calls, etc.
温度传感器280J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中,终端设备200利用温度传感器280J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。例如,当温度传感器280J上报的温度超过阈值,终端设备200执行降低位于温度传感器280J附近的处理器的性能,以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中,当温度低于另一阈值时,终端设备200对电池242加热,以避免低温导致终端设备200异常关机。在其他一些实施例中,当温度低于又一阈值时,终端设备200对电池242的输出电压执行升压,以避免低温导致的异常关机。Temperature sensor 280J is used to detect temperature. In some embodiments, the terminal device 200 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 280J to execute the temperature processing policy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 280J exceeds a threshold, the terminal device 200 reduces the performance of a processor located near the temperature sensor 280J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the terminal device 200 heats the battery 242 to prevent the low temperature from causing the terminal device 200 to shut down abnormally. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the terminal device 200 performs boosting on the output voltage of the battery 242 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
触摸传感器280K,也称“触控面板”。触摸传感器280K可以设置于显示屏294,由触摸传感器280K与显示屏294组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器280K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏294提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器280K也可以设置于终端设备200的表面,与显示屏294所处的位置不同。Touch sensor 280K, also called "touch panel". The touch sensor 280K can be disposed on the display screen 294. The touch sensor 280K and the display screen 294 form a touch screen, which is also called a "touch screen". The touch sensor 280K is used to detect a touch operation on or near the touch sensor 280K. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the touch event type. Visual output related to the touch operation may be provided through display screen 294. In other embodiments, the touch sensor 280K may also be disposed on the surface of the terminal device 200 in a position different from that of the display screen 294 .
骨传导传感器280M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器280M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器280M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器280M也可以设置于耳机中,结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块270可以基于所述骨传导传感器280M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号,解析出语音信号,实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器280M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息,实现心率检测功能。Bone conduction sensor 280M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 280M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human body's vocal part. The bone conduction sensor 280M can also contact the human body's pulse and receive blood pressure beating signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 280M can also be provided in the earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone. The audio module 270 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibrating bone obtained by the bone conduction sensor 280M to implement the voice function. The application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beat signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 280M to implement the heart rate detection function.
按键290包括开机键,音量键等。按键290可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。终端设备200可以接收按键输入,产生与终端设备200的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The buttons 290 include a power button, a volume button, etc. Key 290 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button. The terminal device 200 may receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the terminal device 200 .
马达291可以产生振动提示。马达291可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏294不同区域的触摸操作,马达291也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 291 can generate vibration prompts. The motor 291 can be used for vibration prompts for incoming calls and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations for different applications (such as taking pictures, audio playback, etc.) can correspond to different vibration feedback effects. Acting on touch operations in different areas of the display screen 294, the motor 291 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. Different application scenarios (such as time reminders, receiving information, alarm clocks, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also be customized.
指示器292可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 292 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate charging status, power changes, or may be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, etc.
SIM卡接口295用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口295,或从SIM卡接口295拔出,实现和终端设备200的接触和分离。终端设备200可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口295可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口295可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口295也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口295也可以兼容外部存储卡。终端设备200通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数
据通信等功能。在一些实施例中,终端设备200采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在终端设备200中,不能和终端设备200分离。The SIM card interface 295 is used to connect a SIM card. The SIM card can be inserted into the SIM card interface 295 or pulled out from the SIM card interface 295 to realize contact and separation from the terminal device 200 . The terminal device 200 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. SIM card interface 295 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card, etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 295 at the same time. The types of the plurality of cards may be the same or different. The SIM card interface 295 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 295 is also compatible with external memory cards. The terminal device 200 interacts with the network through the SIM card to realize calls and data. data communication and other functions. In some embodiments, the terminal device 200 adopts eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the terminal device 200 and cannot be separated from the terminal device 200 .
上文对本申请实施例的通信系统和终端设备做了介绍,以下,对本申请实施例涉及的相关术语做说明。The communication system and terminal equipment of the embodiments of the present application are introduced above. The following describes the relevant terms involved in the embodiments of the present application.
双卡双待(dual sim dual standby,DSDS)Dual SIM dual standby (DSDS)
终端设备支持的一种双卡模式,也可以理解为终端设备的双卡能力,双卡的接收天线分时复用。在DSDS模式下,终端设备不支持双卡业务并发,具体表现为:(1)一个卡执行通话业务时,另一个卡无法进行数据业务(即,上网);(2)一个卡执行数据业务时,另一个卡虽然可以接收来电,但来电会打断数据业务。A dual-card mode supported by the terminal device can also be understood as the dual-card capability of the terminal device, and the receiving antennas of the dual-card cards are time-shared and multiplexed. In DSDS mode, the terminal device does not support concurrent dual-card services. The specific manifestations are: (1) When one card performs call services, the other card cannot perform data services (i.e., access the Internet); (2) When one card performs data services , although the other card can receive incoming calls, the incoming calls will interrupt the data service.
对于双卡中的主卡来讲,副卡的通话业务会使得主卡无法进行数据业务,而且,副卡由于搜网、测量、跟踪区更新(tracking area update,TAU)、短信、彩信、周期性注册等行为会抢占天线,使得主卡的上网体验较差。For the main card in the dual card, the call service of the secondary card will make the main card unable to perform data services. Moreover, the secondary card is required to search the network, measure, track area update (TAU), SMS, MMS, cycle Behaviors such as sexual registration will seize the antenna, making the main card's Internet experience poor.
双接收双卡双待(dual receiver-dual sim dual dtandby,DR-DSDS)Dual receiver, dual card, dual standby (dual receiver-dual sim dual dtandby, DR-DSDS)
终端设备支持的另一种双卡模式,也可以理解为终端设备的另一种双卡能力,双卡的接收天线可以分集复用,即一个卡用主集,另一个卡用分集,双卡可以同时接收,但无法同时发送。在DR-DSDS模式下,(1)一个卡执行通话业务时,另一个卡有信号,但是无法响应寻呼,以及,无法进行TAU;(2)一个卡执行数据业务时,另一个卡进行上行传输时,需抢占射频(radio frequency,RF)天线,从而影响执行数据业务的卡的体验。Another dual-card mode supported by the terminal device can also be understood as another dual-card capability of the terminal device. The receiving antennas of the dual cards can be diversity multiplexed, that is, one card uses the main set and the other card uses the diversity. Can receive at the same time, but cannot send at the same time. In DR-DSDS mode, (1) when one card performs call service, the other card has a signal, but cannot respond to paging, and cannot perform TAU; (2) when one card performs data service, the other card performs uplink During transmission, the radio frequency (RF) antenna needs to be preempted, thus affecting the experience of the card performing data services.
双卡双通(dual sin dual active,DSDA)Dual SIM dual active (DSDA)
终端设备支持的另一种双卡模式,也可以理解为终端设备的另一种双卡能力。在DSDA模式下,终端设备支持双卡的业务并发,即两个卡可实现同时发送或接收,一个卡执行通话业务时,另一个卡可以收到来电,也可以执行数据业务(即上网)。Another dual-SIM mode supported by the terminal device can also be understood as another dual-SIM capability of the terminal device. In DSDA mode, the terminal device supports dual-card business concurrency, that is, two cards can send or receive at the same time. When one card performs call services, the other card can receive incoming calls and perform data services (i.e., surf the Internet).
DSDA模式进一步可包括两种模式,DSDA发射共享模式和DSDA发射独享模式。在DSDA发射共享模式下,两个卡在上行传输时共用天线且分时发送,在下行传输时两个卡分别使用不同的天线,不过,由于两个卡的上行传输共用天线,用户上网的性能体验有损失。在DSDA发射独享模式下,两个卡在上行传输时分别使用不同的天线,在下行传输时也分别使用不同的天线,上行传输和下行传输均完全独立,用户上网的性能体验基本无损失,比在DSDA发射独享模式下的性能体验好。The DSDA mode may further include two modes, a DSDA transmit sharing mode and a DSDA transmit exclusive mode. In the DSDA transmission sharing mode, the two cards share an antenna and transmit in a time-sharing manner during uplink transmission. The two cards use different antennas during downlink transmission. However, since the uplink transmission of the two cards shares an antenna, the performance of the user's Internet access There is a loss of experience. In DSDA transmission exclusive mode, the two cards use different antennas for uplink transmission and different antennas for downlink transmission. Uplink transmission and downlink transmission are completely independent, and the user's online performance experience is basically without loss. Better performance experience than in DSDA launch exclusive mode.
非独立组网(non-standalone,NSA)和独立组网(standalone,SA)Non-standalone networking (non-standalone, NSA) and independent networking (standalone, SA)
随着5G的发展,5G包括NSA和SA两种组网方式。With the development of 5G, 5G includes two networking methods: NSA and SA.
NSA指的是利用现有的4G核心网等设施,进行5G网络的部署,是4G和5G融合的组网方式。基于NSA架构的5G载波仅承载用户数据,控制信令仍通过4G网络传输。在NSA中,5G无法单独工作,仅仅是作为4G的补充,分担4G的流量。NSA refers to the deployment of 5G networks using existing 4G core network and other facilities. It is a networking method that integrates 4G and 5G. The 5G carrier based on the NSA architecture only carries user data, and control signaling is still transmitted through the 4G network. In NSA, 5G cannot work alone. It only serves as a supplement to 4G and shares 4G traffic.
SA指的是新建5G网络,包括新基站、回程链路以及核心网。SA引入了全新网元与接口的同时,还将大规模采用网络虚拟化、软件定义网络等新技术,并与5G NR结合,同时其协议开发、网络规划部署及互通互操作所面临的技术挑战将超越3G和4G系统。目前的SA有两种组网方式,一种组网方式是采用5G基站连接5G核心网,这是5G网络架构的终极形态,可以支持5G的所有应用,但花费很大;另一种组网方
式是将现有的4G基站升级,变成增强型4G基站,将增强型4G基站接入5G核心网,花费较少。SA refers to the new 5G network, including new base stations, backhaul links and core networks. While SA introduces new network elements and interfaces, it will also adopt new technologies such as network virtualization and software-defined networks on a large scale and combine them with 5G NR. At the same time, it faces technical challenges in protocol development, network planning and deployment, and interoperability. Will surpass 3G and 4G systems. The current SA has two networking methods. One networking method uses 5G base stations to connect to the 5G core network. This is the ultimate form of 5G network architecture and can support all 5G applications, but it costs a lot; the other networking method square The method is to upgrade the existing 4G base station into an enhanced 4G base station, and connect the enhanced 4G base station to the 5G core network, which costs less.
在本申请实施例中,4G可作为LTE的替换描述,5G可作为NR的替换描述,若无特殊说明,两者可替换描述。In the embodiment of this application, 4G can be used as an alternative description of LTE, and 5G can be used as an alternative description of NR. Unless otherwise specified, the two can be used as alternative descriptions.
如前所述,相比于DSDS模式,DSDA模式的用户体验更好。但是,目前市场上终端设备中主流的芯片对DSDA模式的支持是不完善的,很多场景下终端设备处于DSDS模式而非处于DSDA模式,由此降低了用户体验。可以看出,通过使得终端设备尽可能处于DSDA模式,可以提高用户体验。As mentioned before, compared to DSDS mode, DSDA mode has a better user experience. However, the current mainstream chips in terminal equipment on the market do not have perfect support for DSDA mode. In many scenarios, terminal equipment is in DSDS mode instead of DSDA mode, thus reducing the user experience. It can be seen that by making the terminal device in the DSDA mode as much as possible, the user experience can be improved.
终端设备支持的双卡模式与各个卡所处的网络和频段有关,目前,NR SA网络的部分频段与LTE网络的部分频段支持DSDA模式,以及,NR SA网络的部分频段与NR SA网络的部分频段可支持DSDA模式,其中,NR SA表示5G网络,具体表示组网方式为SA的5G网络,简称NR SA,LTE表示4G网络。The dual-card mode supported by the terminal device is related to the network and frequency band in which each card is located. Currently, some frequency bands of the NR SA network and some frequency bands of the LTE network support the DSDA mode, and some frequency bands of the NR SA network and parts of the NR SA network The frequency band can support DSDA mode, where NR SA represents the 5G network, specifically indicating the 5G network with SA networking mode, referred to as NR SA, and LTE represents the 4G network.
DSDA模式包括一个或多个DSDA组合,DSDA组合包括双卡的网络类型和频段。为了便于描述,可采用“网络1频段号+网络2频段号”的方式表示DSDA组合。此外,可以将LTE网络的频段简称为LTE频段,将NR网络的频段简称为NR频段,LTE频段可以采用LTE频段号表示,LTE频段号可采用Bx表示,x为大于0的整数,例如,B1,同理,NR频段可采用NR频段号表示,NR频段号可采用nx表示,n为大于0的整数,例如,n78。DSDA mode includes one or more DSDA combinations, and DSDA combinations include the network type and frequency band of dual cards. For ease of description, the DSDA combination can be expressed in the form of "network 1 frequency band number + network 2 frequency band number". In addition, the frequency band of the LTE network can be referred to as the LTE frequency band, and the frequency band of the NR network can be referred to as the NR frequency band. The LTE frequency band can be represented by the LTE band number, and the LTE band number can be represented by Bx, where x is an integer greater than 0, for example, B1 , similarly, the NR frequency band can be represented by the NR band number, and the NR band number can be represented by nx, where n is an integer greater than 0, for example, n78.
示例性地,DSDA模式的一个DSDA组合为NR SA n41+LTE B1,表示的是,一个卡驻留在NR SA网络中n41指示的频段,n41为NR频段号,表示一个NR频段,另一个卡驻留在LTE网络中B1指示的频段,B1表示LTE频段号,表示一个LTE频段。For example, a DSDA combination in DSDA mode is NR SA n41+LTE B1, which means that one card resides in the frequency band indicated by n41 in the NR SA network. n41 is the NR frequency band number, indicating an NR frequency band and another card. It resides in the frequency band indicated by B1 in the LTE network. B1 represents the LTE frequency band number and represents an LTE frequency band.
从上述可以看出,只要两个卡当前驻留的网络的网络类型和频段满足DSDA模式中任一个DSDA组合中的网络类型和频段,双卡间就能够形成DSDA模式,终端设备就能够处于DSDA模式。基于此,本申请实施例提出,通过对各个场景的驻网流程做改进,在确定双卡有机会形成DSDA模式的情况下,调整至少一个卡的频段,以使得双卡驻留在DSDA模式的一个DSDA组合中双卡对应的频段上,从而使得双卡间形成DSDA模式,这样,终端设备处于DSDA模式,能够提高用户体验。As can be seen from the above, as long as the network type and frequency band of the network where the two cards currently reside meet the network type and frequency band of any DSDA combination in the DSDA mode, the DSDA mode can be formed between the two cards, and the terminal device can be in DSDA mode. model. Based on this, the embodiments of this application propose that by improving the network parking process in each scenario, when it is determined that the dual cards have a chance to form the DSDA mode, the frequency band of at least one card is adjusted so that the dual cards can camp in the DSDA mode. In a DSDA combination, the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards enable a DSDA mode to be formed between the two cards. In this way, the terminal device is in DSDA mode, which can improve the user experience.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例默认双卡驻留的网络,不需要调整某个卡驻留的网络,仅对某个卡当前驻留网络的频段进行调整。It should be noted that the embodiment of this application defaults to the network where dual cards reside. There is no need to adjust the network where a certain card resides. Only the frequency band of the network where a certain card currently resides is adjusted.
以下,结合附图,对不同场景下的双卡通信的方法做详细说明。Below, combined with the accompanying drawings, the dual-card communication methods in different scenarios are explained in detail.
在本申请实施例中,卡1为主卡和副卡中的其中一个,卡2为主卡和副卡中的另一个,不做任何限定。若无特殊说明,下文对于卡1和卡2的解释同此处,后续不再赘述。In the embodiment of this application, card 1 is one of the primary card and the secondary card, and card 2 is the other of the primary card and the secondary card, without any limitation. If there is no special explanation, the explanation of Card 1 and Card 2 below is the same as here, and will not be repeated again.
图3是本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法300的示意性流程图。该方法300可由支持双卡通信的终端设备执行,也可由终端设备中的芯片执行,本申请实施例不做任何限定。为了便于描述,以终端设备为例对方法300做详细说明。Figure 3 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method 300 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method 300 can be executed by a terminal device that supports dual-SIM communication or by a chip in the terminal device. The embodiments of this application do not impose any limitations. For ease of description, method 300 will be described in detail by taking a terminal device as an example.
方法300所示的实施例是终端设备进行开机选小区的场景,在终端设备进行开机选小区的过程中,通过相关设计尽可能使得双卡驻留在能够形成DSDA模式的频段上。
在方法300中,默认双卡当前驻留的网络,在一个卡已经驻留在某个频段后,另一个卡优先选择能够形成DSDA模式的频段进行驻留。The embodiment shown in method 300 is a scenario in which the terminal device is powered on to select a cell. During the process of powering on the terminal device and selecting a cell, the relevant design is used to ensure that the dual cards reside on the frequency band that can form the DSDA mode. In method 300, the network where the dual cards currently reside is defaulted. After one card has camped in a certain frequency band, the other card preferentially selects the frequency band that can form the DSDA mode to camp.
在S310中,终端设备确定卡1已经完成频段的驻留以及卡2未进行频段的驻留。In S310, the terminal device determines that card 1 has completed parking of the frequency band and card 2 has not performed parking of the frequency band.
在该步骤中,卡1已经完成频段的驻留,卡2还未来得及进行频段的驻留。其中,卡1当前驻留的频段是终端设备支持的任一个频段,本申请实施例不做任何限定。In this step, card 1 has completed parking the frequency band, and card 2 has not yet had time to park the frequency band. Among them, the frequency band that the card 1 currently resides in is any frequency band supported by the terminal device, and the embodiment of this application does not make any limitation.
应理解,卡1完成频段的驻留,卡1驻留的网络也必然确定,卡1当前驻留的频段是卡1当前驻留的网络中的频段。例如,卡1当前驻留的频段是n41指示的频段,n41指示的频段是NR网络中的频段。It should be understood that after card 1 completes the camping of the frequency band, the network where card 1 is camping must also be determined. The frequency band where card 1 is currently camping is the frequency band in the network where card 1 is currently camping. For example, the frequency band that card 1 currently resides on is the frequency band indicated by n41, and the frequency band indicated by n41 is the frequency band in the NR network.
在S320中,终端设备确定满足预设条件的卡2的第一候选频段。其中,该第一候选频段包括一个或多个频段。In S320, the terminal device determines the first candidate frequency band of the card 2 that meets the preset conditions. Wherein, the first candidate frequency band includes one or more frequency bands.
在该步骤中,终端设备对多个小区进行测量,确定多个小区中是否存在满足预设条件的卡2的第一候选频段,若存在,则继续执行S330,若不存在,则结束流程。In this step, the terminal device measures multiple cells to determine whether there is a first candidate frequency band of the card 2 that meets the preset conditions in the multiple cells. If it exists, S330 is continued. If it does not exist, the process ends.
在一些实施例中,预设条件包括:小区满足S准则,以及,小区的频段能够和卡1当前驻留的频段形成终端设备支持的DSDA模式。In some embodiments, the preset conditions include: the cell satisfies the S criterion, and the frequency band of the cell can form a DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band where the card 1 currently resides.
S准则是判断某个小区可否驻留的准则,S准则具体可以为:小区搜索中某个小区的接收功率Srxlev>0dB且某个小区的接收信号的信号质量Squal>0dB。当某个小区满足S准则时,则终端设备可以驻留在该某个小区。以下,对S准则做简单介绍,关于S准则的具体描述可参考3GPP标准中的相关描述,不再赘述。The S criterion is a criterion for judging whether a certain cell can camp. Specifically, the S criterion can be: the received power of a certain cell Srxlev>0dB and the signal quality of the received signal of a certain cell Squal>0dB during cell search. When a certain cell satisfies the S criterion, the terminal device can camp on the certain cell. The following is a brief introduction to the S criterion. For specific descriptions of the S criterion, please refer to the relevant descriptions in the 3GPP standards and will not be repeated.
接收功率Srxlev的公式如下所示:Srxlev=Qrxlevmeas-Qrxlevmin-Pcompensation。The formula of the received power Srxlev is as follows: Srxlev=Qrxlevmeas-Qrxlevmin-Pcompensation.
其中,Qrxlevmeas为小区(即,当前测量的小区)的主公共控制物理信道(primary common control physical channel,P-CCPCH)的接收信号码功率(receive signal channel power,RSCP)值,俗称“电平值”。Qrxlevmin为小区的最小接收功率,该参数可以从系统广播消息中读出,一般终端设备读出后需做一定的算术转换。Pcompensation为一个补偿值,为网络允许的最大发射功率和终端功率等级最大发射功率的差值,可通过如下公式得到:Pcompensation=max(UE_TXP-WR_MAX_RACH-P_MAX,0),UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH为终端设备在做随机接入时在随机接入信道(random access channel,RACH)上允许的最大发送功率,由系统广播消息发送,P_MAX是终端设备的最大发射功率。Among them, Qrxlevmeas is the received signal code power (RSCP) value of the primary common control physical channel (primary common control physical channel, P-CCPCH) of the cell (that is, the currently measured cell), commonly known as the "level value" ". Qrxlevmin is the minimum received power of the cell. This parameter can be read from the system broadcast message. Generally, the terminal equipment needs to perform certain arithmetic conversion after reading it out. Pcompensation is a compensation value, which is the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the network and the maximum transmit power of the terminal power level. It can be obtained by the following formula: Pcompensation=max(UE_TXP-WR_MAX_RACH-P_MAX, 0), UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH is the terminal device doing random operation. The maximum transmission power allowed on the random access channel (RACH) during access is sent by the system broadcast message. P_MAX is the maximum transmission power of the terminal device.
信号质量Squal的公式如下所示:Squal=Qqualmeas–(Qqualmin+Qqualminoffset)。The formula of signal quality Squal is as follows: Squal=Qqualmeas–(Qqualmin+Qqualminoffset).
其中,Qqualmeas为小区的参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality,RSRQ)值,Qqualmin为小区接入的最小RSRQ值,Qqualminoffset为小区接入的最小的RSRQ的偏移值。Among them, Qqualmeas is the reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ) value of the cell, Qqualmin is the minimum RSRQ value of the cell access, and Qqualminoffset is the minimum RSRQ offset value of the cell access.
示例性地,实现中,终端设备对多个小区进行测量,先确定满足S准则的至少一个小区,一个小区对应一个频点以及一个频点对应一个频段(或者说,一个小区对应一个频段),将该至少一个小区对应的至少一个频段称为初始候选频段,终端设备再根据终端设备的DSDA模式信息,从初始候选频段中确定能够和卡1当前驻留的频段形成终端设备支持的DSDA模式的第一候选频段。Exemplarily, in implementation, the terminal device measures multiple cells and first determines at least one cell that satisfies the S criterion. One cell corresponds to one frequency point and one frequency point corresponds to one frequency band (or, one cell corresponds to one frequency band). At least one frequency band corresponding to the at least one cell is called an initial candidate frequency band. The terminal device then determines from the initial candidate frequency bands according to the DSDA mode information of the terminal device that can form a DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band where card 1 currently resides. The first candidate frequency band.
应理解,这里的频点表示的是中心频点,频点表示固定频率的编号,根据固定频
率可以得到频段。It should be understood that the frequency point here represents the center frequency point, and the frequency point represents the number of the fixed frequency. According to the fixed frequency The frequency band can be obtained at the rate.
还应理解,第一候选频段中的频段是初始候选频段中的部分或全部频段。若初始候选频段中的所有频段均能够和卡1当前驻留的频段形成终端设备支持的DSDA模式,则第一候选频段的频段为初始候选频段的全部频段;若初始候选频段中的部分频段能够和卡1当前驻留的频段形成终端设备支持的DSDA模式,则第一候选频段为初始候选频段中的部分频段。It should also be understood that the frequency bands in the first candidate frequency band are some or all of the initial candidate frequency bands. If all the frequency bands in the initial candidate frequency band can form the DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band where card 1 currently resides, the frequency band of the first candidate frequency band is all the frequency bands of the initial candidate frequency band; if some of the frequency bands in the initial candidate frequency band can and the frequency band where card 1 currently resides forms the DSDA mode supported by the terminal device, then the first candidate frequency band is part of the initial candidate frequency band.
需要说明的是,第一候选频段中的每个频段与卡1当前驻留的频段均可形成终端设备支持的一个DSDA组合,例如,第一候选频段包括N个频段,意味着第一候选频段中的N个频段与卡1当前驻留的频段可形成终端设备支持的N个DSDA组合。It should be noted that each frequency band in the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where card 1 currently resides can form a DSDA combination supported by the terminal device. For example, the first candidate frequency band includes N frequency bands, which means that the first candidate frequency band The N frequency bands in and the frequency band where card 1 currently resides can form N DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device.
DSDA模式信息用于指示终端设备支持的能够形成DSDA模式的所有DSDA组合,每个DSDA组合包括双卡的网络类型和频段。实现中,可以在终端设备中预配置DSDA模式信息。DSDA mode information is used to indicate all DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device that can form a DSDA mode. Each DSDA combination includes the network type and frequency band of the dual card. During implementation, DSDA mode information can be pre-configured in the terminal device.
应理解,同一个终端设备支持的DSDA组合是固定的,不同终端设备支持的DSDA组合可以相同也可以不同,具体可以根据终端设备的型号或硬件信息确定。为了便于描述,以表1的形式列出某个终端设备支持的双卡模式的组合,在表1中,DSDA模式有3个DSDA组合,DSDA发射共享模式中由NR SA n1+NR SA n1形成的DSDA组合,DSDA发射独享模式中由NR SA n1+NR SA n78形成的DSDA组合,DSDA发射独享模式中由NR SA n1+LTE B41形成的DSDA组合。其中,表1中的3个DSDA组合可以是DSDA模式信息指示的终端设备支持的所有DSDA组合。It should be understood that the DSDA combinations supported by the same terminal device are fixed, and the DSDA combinations supported by different terminal devices may be the same or different. The details may be determined based on the model or hardware information of the terminal device. For the convenience of description, the combinations of dual-card modes supported by a certain terminal device are listed in Table 1. In Table 1, the DSDA mode has 3 DSDA combinations. The DSDA transmission sharing mode is formed by NR SA n1+NR SA n1 The DSDA combination is the DSDA combination formed by NR SA n1+NR SA n78 in the DSDA transmission exclusive mode, and the DSDA combination formed by NR SA n1+LTE B41 in the DSDA transmission exclusive mode. Among them, the three DSDA combinations in Table 1 can be all DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device indicated by the DSDA mode information.
表1
Table 1
Table 1
以下,举例说明终端设备确定卡2的第一候选频段的过程。The following is an example of a process in which the terminal device determines the first candidate frequency band of the card 2 .
假设,卡1当前驻留的频段为网络1的频段11,确定的卡2满足S准则的初始候选频段包括网络2的4个频段,分别是频段21、频段22、频段23和频段24,终端设备的DSDA模式信息指示的终端设备支持的所有DSDA组合有3个DSDA组合,分别是:由“网络1频段11+网络2频段21”形成的DSDA组合1,以及,由“网络1频段11+网络2频段22”形成的DSDA组合2,由“网络1频段12+网络2频段23”形成的DSDA组合3。可以看出,网络1的频段11(卡1当前驻留的频段)和初始候选频段中的频段21可以形成终端设备支持的DSDA组合1,网络1的频段11(卡1当前驻留的频段)和初始候选频段中的频段22可以形成终端设备支持的DSDA组合2,初始候选频段中的频段23无法与网络1的频段11(卡1当前驻留的频段)形成DSDA组合,所以,初始候选频段中的频段23不能成为第一候选频段,此外,终端设备支持的DSDA组合中并没有网络2的频段24,因此,初始候选频段中的频段24也不能成为第一候选频段。所以,将频段21和频段22确定为第一候选频段。Assume that the frequency band currently occupied by card 1 is frequency band 11 of network 1. The initial candidate frequency bands determined by card 2 that meet the S criterion include four frequency bands of network 2, namely frequency band 21, frequency band 22, frequency band 23 and frequency band 24. The terminal All DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device indicated by the device's DSDA mode information include 3 DSDA combinations, namely: DSDA combination 1 formed by "Network 1 Band 11 + Network 2 Band 21", and, formed by "Network 1 Band 11 + DSDA combination 2 formed by "network 2 frequency band 22", and DSDA combination 3 formed by "network 1 frequency band 12 + network 2 frequency band 23". It can be seen that frequency band 11 of network 1 (the frequency band where card 1 currently resides) and frequency band 21 in the initial candidate frequency band can form the DSDA combination 1 supported by the terminal device. Frequency band 11 of network 1 (the frequency band where card 1 currently resides) The frequency band 22 in the initial candidate frequency band can form the DSDA combination 2 supported by the terminal device. The frequency band 23 in the initial candidate frequency band cannot form a DSDA combination with the frequency band 11 of the network 1 (the frequency band where the card 1 currently resides). Therefore, the initial candidate frequency band The frequency band 23 in cannot become the first candidate frequency band. In addition, the DSDA combination supported by the terminal device does not include the frequency band 24 of network 2. Therefore, the frequency band 24 in the initial candidate frequency band cannot become the first candidate frequency band. Therefore, frequency band 21 and frequency band 22 are determined as the first candidate frequency bands.
在S330中,终端设备从第一候选频段中确定目标频段,将卡2驻留在目标频段上。In S330, the terminal device determines the target frequency band from the first candidate frequency band and parks the card 2 on the target frequency band.
若第一候选频段包括一个频段,则将这个唯一的频段确定为目标频段。若第一候选频段包括多个频段,则将该多个频段中的某个频段确定为目标频段,该目标频段可以是该多个频段中的任一个频段,也可以是按照规则确定的某个频段,此处不做任何限定。If the first candidate frequency band includes one frequency band, this unique frequency band is determined as the target frequency band. If the first candidate frequency band includes multiple frequency bands, then a certain frequency band among the multiple frequency bands is determined as the target frequency band. The target frequency band can be any one of the multiple frequency bands, or it can be a certain frequency band determined according to the rules. Frequency band, there is no limitation here.
在第一候选频段包括多个频段的实施例中,终端设备将第一候选频段中优先级最高的频段确定为目标频段。In the embodiment where the first candidate frequency band includes multiple frequency bands, the terminal device determines the frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands as the target frequency band.
在一些实施例中,该优先级最高的频段是第一候选频段中与卡1当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段。也就是说,第一候选频段中与卡1当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段为目标频段。In some embodiments, the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the frequency band where card 1 currently resides in the first candidate frequency band. That is to say, the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the frequency band where card 1 currently resides in the first candidate frequency band is the target frequency band.
该实施例是从双卡模式的能力定义第一候选频段中频段的优先级的。第一候选频段中某个频段与卡1当前驻留的频段形成的双卡模式的能力越好,该某个频段的优先级越高,反之,第一候选频段中某个频段与卡1当前驻留的频段形成的双卡模式的能力越差,该某个频段的优先级越低。双卡模式的能力由高到低为:DSDA发射独享>DSDA发射共享>DR-DSDS>DSDS。In this embodiment, the priority of the frequency band in the first candidate frequency band is defined based on the capability of dual-SIM mode. The better the capability of dual-SIM mode formed by a certain frequency band in the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where card 1 currently resides, the higher the priority of this certain frequency band. On the contrary, the higher the priority of a certain frequency band in the first candidate frequency band and the current frequency band of card 1. The worse the capability of the dual-SIM mode formed by the resident frequency band, the lower the priority of a certain frequency band. The capabilities of dual-SIM mode from high to low are: DSDA transmitter exclusive > DSDA transmitter shared > DR-DSDS > DSDS.
在另一些实施例中,该优先级最高的频段是第一候选频段中信号最强的频段。也就是说,第一候选频段中信号最强的频段为目标频段。In other embodiments, the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands. That is to say, the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands is the target frequency band.
该实施例是从频段的信号强度定义第一候选频段中频段的优先级的。第一候选频段中某个频段的信号强度越好,该某个频段的优先级越高,反之,第一候选频段中某个频段的信号强度越差,该某个频段的优先级越低。In this embodiment, the priority of the frequency band in the first candidate frequency band is defined based on the signal strength of the frequency band. The better the signal strength of a certain frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, the higher the priority of this certain frequency band. On the contrary, the worse the signal strength of a certain frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, the lower the priority of this certain frequency band.
需要说明的是,上述定义的第一候选频段中频段的优先级可以单独使用,也可以结合使用。It should be noted that the priority of the frequency bands in the first candidate frequency band defined above can be used alone or in combination.
在结合使用上述频段的优先级时,在一些实施例中,将双卡模式的能力与频段的信号强度结合起来,优先从双卡模式的能力考虑频段的优先级,再从频段的信号强度
考虑频段的优先级。一般情况下,若第一候选频段中与卡1当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段有多个时,可以进一步结合频段的信号强度确定目标频段。When combining the priorities of the above frequency bands, in some embodiments, the capability of the dual-SIM mode is combined with the signal strength of the frequency band. The priority of the frequency band is first considered based on the capability of the dual-SIM mode, and then the signal strength of the frequency band is considered. Consider band priority. Generally, if there are multiple frequency bands in the first candidate frequency band that have the best dual-card mode capabilities in the DSDA mode formed by the frequency band where card 1 currently resides, the target frequency band can be further determined by combining the signal strength of the frequency bands.
图4是本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法400的示意性流程图。该方法400可由支持双卡通信的终端设备执行,也可由终端设备中的芯片执行,本申请实施例不做任何限定。为了便于描述,以终端设备为例对方法400做详细说明。Figure 4 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method 400 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method 400 can be executed by a terminal device that supports dual-SIM communication or by a chip in the terminal device. The embodiments of this application do not impose any limitations. For ease of description, method 400 will be described in detail by taking a terminal device as an example.
方法400所示的实施例是终端设备已经驻留小区后进行小区重选(cell reselection)的场景。小区重选指的是终端设备在空闲模式下通过监测邻区和当前服务小区的信号质量以选择一个信号最好的小区提供服务信号的过程,当邻区的信号质量Squal及接收功率Srxlev满足S准则且满足一定重选判决准则时,终端设备可以将某个卡接入该邻区进行驻留,以驻留在该邻区的频段上。The embodiment shown in method 400 is a scenario in which a terminal device performs cell reselection after it has camped in a cell. Cell reselection refers to the process in which the terminal equipment selects a cell with the best signal to provide service signals by monitoring the signal quality of neighboring cells and the current serving cell in idle mode. When the signal quality Squal and received power Srxlev of the neighboring cell satisfy S When certain reselection criteria are met and certain reselection criteria are met, the terminal device can connect a card to the neighboring cell to camp on the frequency band of the neighboring cell.
在本申请实施例的终端设备进行小区重选的过程中,通过相关设计尽可能使得双卡驻留在能够形成DSDA模式的频段上。在方法400中,默认双卡当前驻留的小区的网络,调整某个卡驻留的频段,以使得双卡间形成DSDA模式。During the cell reselection process of the terminal equipment in the embodiment of the present application, the relevant design is used to ensure that the dual cards reside on the frequency band that can form the DSDA mode. In method 400, the network of the cell where the dual cards currently reside is defaulted, and the frequency band where a certain card resides is adjusted so that a DSDA mode is formed between the dual cards.
在S410中,终端设备确定卡1和卡2已经完成频段的驻留。In S410, the terminal device determines that card 1 and card 2 have completed parking of the frequency band.
在S420中,终端设备确定卡1和卡2之间是否形成DSDA模式。In S420, the terminal device determines whether the DSDA mode is formed between card 1 and card 2.
若终端设备确定双卡间已经形成DSDA模式,则结束流程;若终端设备确定双卡间未形成DSDA模式,则继续执行步骤S430,以在满足一定条件的情况下尽可能使得双卡间形成DSDA模式以使得终端设备处于DSDA模式。If the terminal device determines that the DSDA mode has been formed between the dual cards, the process ends; if the terminal device determines that the DSDA mode has not been formed between the dual cards, step S430 is continued to enable DSDA to be formed between the dual cards as much as possible under the condition that certain conditions are met. mode to put the terminal device in DSDA mode.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备的DSDA模式由RF前端的并发能力决定,因此,可以通过RF驱动可以识别终端设备的双卡模式。In this embodiment of the present application, the DSDA mode of the terminal device is determined by the concurrency capability of the RF front end. Therefore, the dual-SIM mode of the terminal device can be identified through the RF driver.
在S430中,终端设备确定卡1的邻区频点。In S430, the terminal device determines the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1.
在该步骤中,终端设备确定卡1所在的同系统和/或异系统的邻区频点。实现中,可以先确定同系统的邻区频点,再确定异系统的邻区频点。其中,卡1的邻区频点包括一个或多个频点。In this step, the terminal device determines the adjacent cell frequency points of the same system and/or different systems where the card 1 is located. In implementation, you can first determine the frequency points of neighboring cells in the same system, and then determine the frequency points of neighboring cells in different systems. Among them, the neighboring frequency points of card 1 include one or more frequency points.
在S440中,终端设备根据卡1的邻区频点,确定是否存在满足预设条件1的卡1的第一候选频段。In S440, the terminal device determines whether there is a first candidate frequency band for card 1 that satisfies preset condition 1 based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1.
一个频点对应一个频段,所以,根据卡1的邻区频点可以得到每个频点对应的频段,进而得到满足预设条件的卡1的第一候选频段。One frequency point corresponds to one frequency band. Therefore, the frequency band corresponding to each frequency point can be obtained according to the neighboring frequency points of card 1, and then the first candidate frequency band of card 1 that meets the preset conditions is obtained.
在该步骤中,卡2依然驻留在当前频段,不调整卡2的频段,根据卡1的邻区频点确定是否存在满足预设条件1的卡1的第一候选频段,以调整卡1的频段。若卡1的邻区频点中存在满足预设条件1的卡1的第一候选频段,意味着双卡之间有机会形成DSDA模式,则继续步骤S450;若卡1的邻区频点中不存在满足预设条件1的卡1的第一候选频段,意味着在卡1的邻区频点中的任一个频点对应的频段均无法与卡2当前驻留的频段形成DSDA模式,因此,可以尝试调整卡2的频段而不调整卡1的频段,即执行步骤S460,后续做具体描述。In this step, card 2 still resides in the current frequency band and does not adjust the frequency band of card 2. It determines whether there is a first candidate frequency band for card 1 that meets the preset condition 1 based on the neighboring frequency points of card 1 to adjust card 1. frequency band. If the first candidate frequency band of card 1 that meets the preset condition 1 exists in the neighboring frequency point of card 1, which means that there is a chance to form a DSDA mode between the two cards, then continue to step S450; if the neighboring frequency point of card 1 There is no first candidate frequency band for card 1 that meets preset condition 1, which means that the frequency band corresponding to any frequency point in the neighboring frequency points of card 1 cannot form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where card 2 currently resides. Therefore, , you can try to adjust the frequency band of card 2 without adjusting the frequency band of card 1, that is, perform step S460, which will be described in detail later.
在一些实施例中,预设条件1为:邻区满足S准则和R准则,以及,邻区的频段能够和卡2当前驻留的频段形成DSDA模式。In some embodiments, the preset condition 1 is: the neighboring cell satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion, and the frequency band of the neighboring cell can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where the card 2 currently resides.
关于S准则的具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。
For the specific description of the S criterion, please refer to the relevant description above and will not be repeated again.
R准则具体可以为:在Treselection时间内(同频和异频的Treselection可能不同)内,邻区的Rn持续超过服务小区的Rs,则终端设备会重选到该邻区。Specifically, the R criterion can be: within the Treselection time (the Treselection of the same frequency and the inter-frequency may be different), if the Rn of the neighboring cell continues to exceed the Rs of the serving cell, the terminal device will reselect to the neighboring cell.
Rn和Rs分别满足如下公式:Rs=Qmeas,s+QHyst,Rt=Qmeas,n–Qoffset。其中,Qmeas为测量小区的参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)值,Qmeas,s即为服务小区的RSRP值,Qmeas,n即为邻区的RSRP值,Qoffset定义了邻区的偏移值,对于具有同等优先级的异频小区来说,包括基于小区的偏移值和基于频率的偏移值两个部分。关于R准则的具体描述可参考3GPP标准中的相关描述,不再赘述。Rn and Rs respectively satisfy the following formulas: Rs=Qmeas,s+QHyst, Rt=Qmeas,n–Qoffset. Among them, Qmeas is the reference signal receiving power (RSRP) value of the measurement cell, Qmeas,s is the RSRP value of the serving cell, Qmeas,n is the RSRP value of the neighboring cell, and Qoffset defines the offset of the neighboring cell. The offset value, for inter-frequency cells with the same priority, includes two parts: a cell-based offset value and a frequency-based offset value. For specific descriptions of the R criterion, please refer to the relevant descriptions in the 3GPP standards and will not be described again.
示例性地,实现中,终端设备先根据卡1的邻区频点确定满足S准则和R准则的卡1的初始候选频段,再根据终端设备的DSDA模式信息,从卡1的初始候选频段中确定能够和卡2当前驻留的频段形成DSDA模式的卡1的第一候选频段。Exemplarily, in the implementation, the terminal device first determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 that satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1, and then selects the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 from the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 based on the DSDA mode information of the terminal device. Determine the first candidate frequency band of card 1 that can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where card 2 currently resides.
具体地,一个小区对应一个频点以及一个频点对应一个频段(或者说,一个小区具有一个频段),终端设备从卡1的邻区频点中确定满足S准则和R准则的至少一个邻区对应的至少一个频点(至少一个邻区与至少一个频点一一对应),根据每个频点确定对应的频段,得到至少一个频段,将该至少一个频段统称为卡1的初始候选频段;然后,再根据终端设备的DSDA模式信息,从卡1的初始候选频段中确定出能够和卡2当前驻留的频段形成DSDA模式的卡1的第一候选频段。Specifically, one cell corresponds to one frequency point and one frequency point corresponds to one frequency band (or, in other words, one cell has one frequency band). The terminal device determines at least one neighboring cell that satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion from the neighboring cell frequency points of card 1. Corresponding to at least one frequency point (at least one neighboring cell corresponds to at least one frequency point one-to-one), determine the corresponding frequency band according to each frequency point, and obtain at least one frequency band. The at least one frequency band is collectively referred to as the initial candidate frequency band of card 1; Then, based on the DSDA mode information of the terminal device, the first candidate frequency band of card 1 that can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where card 2 currently resides is determined from the initial candidate frequency bands of card 1 .
关于终端设备的DSDA模式信息的具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,以及,关于卡1的第一候选频段与卡1的初始候选频段的关系的具体描述可参考上文关于第一候选频段与初始候选频段的相关描述,不再赘述。For a detailed description of the DSDA mode information of the terminal device, please refer to the relevant description above. For a detailed description of the relationship between the first candidate frequency band of card 1 and the initial candidate frequency band of card 1, please refer to the above description of the relationship between the first candidate frequency band and the initial candidate frequency band of card 1. The relevant description of the initial candidate frequency band will not be described again.
需要说明的是,卡1的第一候选频段中的每个频段与卡2当前驻留的频段均可形成终端设备支持的一个DSDA组合,例如,卡1的第一候选频段包括N个频段,意味着卡1的第一候选频段中的N个频段与卡2当前驻留的频段可形成终端设备支持的N个DSDA组合。It should be noted that each frequency band in the first candidate frequency band of card 1 and the frequency band currently occupied by card 2 can form a DSDA combination supported by the terminal device. For example, the first candidate frequency band of card 1 includes N frequency bands. This means that the N frequency bands in the first candidate frequency band of card 1 and the frequency band where card 2 currently resides can form N DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device.
以下,举例说明终端设备确定卡1的第一候选频段的过程。The following is an example of a process in which the terminal device determines the first candidate frequency band of the card 1 .
假设,卡2当前驻留的频段为网络2的频段21,确定的满足S准则和R准则的卡1的初始候选频段包括网络1的4个频段,分别是频段11、频段12、频段13和频段14,终端设备的DSDA模式信息指示的终端设备支持的所有DSDA组合有3个DSDA组合,分别是:由“网络1频段11+网络2频段21”形成的DSDA组合1,以及,由“网络1频段12+网络2频段21”形成的DSDA组合2,由“网络1频段13+网络2频段22”形成的DSDA组合3。可以看出,网络2的频段21(卡2当前驻留的频段)和卡1的初始候选频段中的频段11可以形成终端设备支持的DSDA组合1,网络2的频段21(卡2当前驻留的频段)和卡1的初始候选频段中的频段12可以形成终端设备支持的DSDA组合2,卡1的初始候选频段中的频段13无法与网络2的频段21(卡2当前驻留的频段)形成DSDA组合,所以,卡1的初始候选频段中的频段13不能成为第一候选频段,此外,终端设备支持的DSDA组合中并没有网络1的频段14,因此,卡1的初始候选频段中的频段14也不能成为第一候选频段。所以,将频段11和频段12确定为卡1的第一候选频段,这样,便得到了满足预设条件1的卡1的第一候选频段。
Assume that the frequency band currently occupied by card 2 is frequency band 21 of network 2. The initial candidate frequency bands of card 1 that meet the S criterion and R criterion include four frequency bands of network 1, namely frequency band 11, frequency band 12, frequency band 13 and Band 14, all DSDA combinations supported by the terminal equipment indicated by the DSDA mode information of the terminal equipment, there are 3 DSDA combinations, namely: DSDA combination 1 formed by "Network 1 Frequency Band 11 + Network 2 Frequency Band 21", and, formed by "Network 1 Frequency Band 11 + Network 2 Frequency Band 21" DSDA combination 2 is formed by "1 band 12 + network 2 band 21", and DSDA combination 3 is formed by "network 1 band 13 + network 2 band 22". It can be seen that frequency band 21 of network 2 (the frequency band where card 2 currently resides) and frequency band 11 in the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 can form the DSDA combination 1 supported by the terminal device. Frequency band 21 of network 2 (where card 2 currently resides) The frequency band) and the frequency band 12 in the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 can form the DSDA combination 2 supported by the terminal device. The frequency band 13 in the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 cannot be combined with the frequency band 21 of network 2 (the frequency band where card 2 currently resides) A DSDA combination is formed, so frequency band 13 in the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 cannot become the first candidate frequency band. In addition, the DSDA combination supported by the terminal device does not include frequency band 14 of network 1. Therefore, frequency band 13 in the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 Band 14 cannot be the first candidate band either. Therefore, frequency band 11 and frequency band 12 are determined as the first candidate frequency band of card 1. In this way, the first candidate frequency band of card 1 that meets the preset condition 1 is obtained.
需要说明的是,在步骤S440和S450中描述的初始候选频段、第一候选频段均是卡1的相关频段,而在步骤S460和S470中描述的初始候选频段、第一候选频段均是卡2的相关频段,若无特殊说明,方法400中关于这些频段的解释以此处的解释为准,下文不再赘述。It should be noted that the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band described in steps S440 and S450 are both relevant frequency bands of card 1, while the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band described in steps S460 and S470 are both card 2 Relevant frequency bands, unless otherwise specified, the explanations about these frequency bands in method 400 shall be subject to the explanations here, and will not be described again below.
在S450中,终端设备从卡1的第一候选频段中确定目标频段1,对卡1的频段进行调整,以使得卡1驻留在目标频段1上。In S450, the terminal device determines the target frequency band 1 from the first candidate frequency band of the card 1, and adjusts the frequency band of the card 1 so that the card 1 resides on the target frequency band 1.
若卡1的第一候选频段包括一个频段,则将这个唯一的频段确定为目标频段1。若卡1的第一候选频段包括多个频段,则将该多个频段中的某个频段确定为目标频段1,该目标频段1可以是该多个频段中的任一个频段,也可以是按照规则确定的某个频段,此处不做任何限定。If the first candidate frequency band of card 1 includes one frequency band, this unique frequency band is determined as target frequency band 1. If the first candidate frequency band of card 1 includes multiple frequency bands, then determine one of the multiple frequency bands as the target frequency band 1. The target frequency band 1 can be any one of the multiple frequency bands, or it can be based on A certain frequency band determined by the rules, there are no restrictions here.
在卡1的第一候选频段包括多个频段的实施例中,终端设备将卡1的第一候选频段中优先级最高的频段确定为目标频段1。In an embodiment where the first candidate frequency band of card 1 includes multiple frequency bands, the terminal device determines the frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands of card 1 as target frequency band 1.
在一些实施例中,该优先级最高的频段是卡1的第一候选频段中与卡2当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段。也就是说,卡1的第一候选频段中与卡2当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段为目标频段1。In some embodiments, the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band of card 1 and the frequency band where card 2 currently resides. That is to say, among the first candidate frequency bands of card 1 and the frequency band where card 2 currently resides, the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode is the target frequency band 1.
在另一些实施例中,该优先级最高的频段是卡1的第一候选频段中信号最强的频段。也就是说,卡1的第一候选频段中信号最强的频段为目标频段1。In other embodiments, the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands of card 1 . In other words, the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands of card 1 is target frequency band 1.
需要说明的是,上述卡1的第一候选频段中频段的优先级可以单独使用,也可以结合使用,具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。It should be noted that the priority of the frequency bands in the first candidate frequency band of the above-mentioned card 1 can be used alone or in combination. For specific description, please refer to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
关于上述从卡1的第一候选频段中确定目标频段1的具体描述可参考上文中关于从第一候选频段中确定目标频段的相关描述,不再赘述。For the detailed description of determining the target frequency band 1 from the first candidate frequency band of the card 1, please refer to the above related description of determining the target frequency band from the first candidate frequency band, which will not be described again.
在S460中,终端设备确定卡2的邻区频点。In S460, the terminal device determines the neighboring cell frequency point of card 2.
在终端设备根据卡1的邻区频点,确定不存在满足预设条件1的卡1的第一候选频段的情况下,意味着在卡1的邻区频点中的任一个频点对应的频段均无法与卡2当前驻留的频段形成DSDA模式,因此,可以尝试调整卡2的频段而不调整卡1的频段,即执行步骤S460。When the terminal device determines that there is no first candidate frequency band for card 1 that satisfies preset condition 1 based on the neighboring frequency points of card 1, it means that the frequency corresponding to any one of the neighboring frequency points of card 1 None of the frequency bands can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where card 2 currently resides. Therefore, you can try to adjust the frequency band of card 2 without adjusting the frequency band of card 1, that is, perform step S460.
在该步骤中,终端设备确定卡2所在的同系统和/或异系统的邻区频点。实现中,可以先确定同系统的邻区频点,再确定异系统的邻区频点。其中,卡2的邻区频点包括一个或多个频点。In this step, the terminal device determines the adjacent cell frequency points of the same system and/or different systems where the card 2 is located. In implementation, you can first determine the frequency points of neighboring cells in the same system, and then determine the frequency points of neighboring cells in different systems. Among them, the neighboring frequency points of card 2 include one or more frequency points.
在S470中,终端设备根据卡2的邻区频点,确定是否存在满足预设条件2的卡2的第一候选频段。In S470, the terminal device determines whether there is a first candidate frequency band for card 2 that satisfies preset condition 2 based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 2.
一个频点对应一个频段,所以,根据卡2的邻区频点可以得到每个频点对应的频段,进而得到满足预设条件2的卡2的第一候选频段。One frequency point corresponds to one frequency band. Therefore, the frequency band corresponding to each frequency point can be obtained according to the neighboring frequency points of card 2, and then the first candidate frequency band of card 2 that meets the preset condition 2 is obtained.
在该步骤中,卡1依然驻留在当前频段,不调整卡1的频段,根据卡2的邻区频点确定是否存在满足预设条件2的卡2的第一候选频段。若卡2的邻区频点中存在满足预设条件2的卡2的第一候选频段,意味着双卡之间有机会形成DSDA模式,则继续步骤S480,若卡2的邻区频点中不存在满足预设条件2的卡2的第一候选频段,意味着在卡1的邻区频点中的任一个频点对应的频段均无法与卡2当前驻留的频段形成
DSDA模式,结束流程。In this step, card 1 still resides in the current frequency band, does not adjust the frequency band of card 1, and determines whether there is a first candidate frequency band for card 2 that meets the preset condition 2 based on the neighboring frequency points of card 2. If the first candidate frequency band of card 2 that meets the preset condition 2 exists in the neighboring frequency point of card 2, which means that there is a chance to form a DSDA mode between the two cards, then continue to step S480. If the neighboring frequency point of card 2 There is no first candidate frequency band for card 2 that meets preset condition 2, which means that the frequency band corresponding to any frequency point in the neighboring frequency points of card 1 cannot form a frequency band with the frequency band where card 2 currently resides. DSDA mode, end the process.
在一些实施例中,预设条件2为:邻区满足S准则和R准则,以及,邻区的频段能够和卡1当前驻留的频段形成DSDA模式。In some embodiments, the preset condition 2 is: the neighboring cell satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion, and the frequency band of the neighboring cell can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where the card 1 currently resides.
关于S准则和R准则的具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。For specific descriptions of the S criterion and the R criterion, please refer to the relevant descriptions above and will not be described again.
示例性地,实现中,终端设备先根据卡1的邻区频点确定满足S准则和R准则的卡2的初始候选频段,再根据终端设备的DSDA模式信息,从卡2的初始候选频段中确定能够和卡1当前驻留的频段形成DSDA模式的卡2的第一候选频段。Exemplarily, in implementation, the terminal device first determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 that satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1, and then determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 from the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 based on the DSDA mode information of the terminal device. Determine the first candidate frequency band of card 2 that can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where card 1 currently resides.
这里,确定卡2的初始候选频段以及卡2的第一候选频段的过程与上文中确定卡1的初始候选频段以及卡1的第一候选频段的过程类似,关于确定卡2的初始候选频段以及卡2的第一候选频段的具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。Here, the process of determining the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 and the first candidate frequency band of card 2 is similar to the process of determining the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 and the first candidate frequency band of card 1 above. Regarding determining the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 and For a specific description of the first candidate frequency band of card 2, reference may be made to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
在S480中,终端设备从卡2的第一候选频段中确定目标频段2,对卡2的频段进行调整,以使得卡2驻留在目标频段2上。In S480, the terminal device determines the target frequency band 2 from the first candidate frequency band of the card 2, and adjusts the frequency band of the card 2 so that the card 2 resides on the target frequency band 2.
若卡2的第一候选频段包括一个频段,则将这个唯一的频段确定为目标频段2。若卡2的第一候选频段包括多个频段,则将该多个频段中的某个频段确定为目标频段2,该目标频段2可以是该多个频段中的任一个频段,也可以是按照规则确定的某个频段,此处不做任何限定。If the first candidate frequency band of card 2 includes one frequency band, this unique frequency band is determined as target frequency band 2. If the first candidate frequency band of card 2 includes multiple frequency bands, then a certain frequency band in the multiple frequency bands is determined as the target frequency band 2. The target frequency band 2 can be any one of the multiple frequency bands, or it can be based on A certain frequency band determined by the rules, there are no restrictions here.
在卡2的第一候选频段包括多个频段的实施例中,终端设备将卡2的第一候选频段中优先级最高的频段确定为目标频段2。In an embodiment in which the first candidate frequency band of the card 2 includes multiple frequency bands, the terminal device determines the frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands of the card 2 as the target frequency band 2.
在一些实施例中,该优先级最高的频段是卡2的第一候选频段中与卡1当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段。也就是说,卡2的第一候选频段中与卡1当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段为目标频段2。In some embodiments, the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band of card 2 and the frequency band where card 1 currently resides. That is to say, among the first candidate frequency bands of card 2 and the frequency band where card 1 currently resides, the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode is the target frequency band 2.
在另一些实施例中,该优先级最高的频段是卡2的第一候选频段中信号最强的频段。也就是说,卡2的第一候选频段中信号最强的频段为目标频段2。In other embodiments, the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands of the card 2 . In other words, the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands of card 2 is target frequency band 2.
需要说明的是,上述卡2的第一候选频段中频段的优先级可以单独使用,也可以结合使用,具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。It should be noted that the priority of the frequency bands in the first candidate frequency band of the above-mentioned card 2 can be used alone or in combination. For specific description, please refer to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
关于上述从卡2的第一候选频段中确定目标频段2的具体描述可参考上文中关于从第一候选频段中确定目标频段的相关描述,不再赘述。For the specific description of determining the target frequency band 2 from the first candidate frequency band of the card 2, please refer to the above related description of determining the target frequency band from the first candidate frequency band, which will not be described again.
应理解,上述方法400中步骤的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that the size of the sequence numbers of the steps in the above method 400 does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application.
在一些实施例中,在S440中,若终端设备确定不存在满足预设条件1的卡1的第一候选频段,可直接结束流程,不需要再去尝试调整卡2的频段。In some embodiments, in S440, if the terminal device determines that there is no first candidate frequency band for card 1 that meets preset condition 1, the process can be ended directly without trying to adjust the frequency band of card 2.
在一些实施例中,在S430中,终端设备可以提前确定卡1的邻区频段和卡2的邻区频点,在S440中,若终端设备确定不存在满足预设条件1的卡1的第一候选频段,可直接根据提前确定的卡2的邻区频段执行S470。In some embodiments, in S430, the terminal device can determine the neighboring frequency band of card 1 and the neighboring frequency point of card 2 in advance. In S440, if the terminal device determines that there is no third frequency band of card 1 that meets the preset condition 1, For a candidate frequency band, S470 can be executed directly based on the neighboring frequency band of card 2 determined in advance.
在一些实施例中,调整卡1和调整卡2的先后顺序可以调整,即,在S420后,可先执行S460-S480,不满足条件时,再执行S430-S450。In some embodiments, the order of adjustment card 1 and adjustment card 2 can be adjusted, that is, after S420, S460-S480 can be executed first, and when the conditions are not met, S430-S450 can be executed again.
图5是本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法500的示意性流程图。同上述方法实
施例,为了便于描述,以终端设备为例对方法500做详细说明。Figure 5 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method 500 provided by an embodiment of the present application. Same as above method Embodiment, for convenience of description, the method 500 is described in detail by taking a terminal device as an example.
同方法400,方法500所示的实施例也是终端设备已经驻留小区后进行小区重选的场景。与方法400不同之处在于,终端设备提前检测卡1和卡2的邻区频点,根据卡1和卡2的邻区频点,确定卡1和卡2能够形成DSDA模式的至少一个DSDA组合,根据至少一个DSDA组合中的某个DSDA组合调整卡1和卡2驻留的频段,以使得卡1和卡2驻留在该某个DSDA组合中双卡对应的频段。Similar to method 400, the embodiment shown in method 500 is also a scenario where the terminal device performs cell reselection after it has camped in a cell. The difference from method 400 is that the terminal device detects the neighboring frequency points of card 1 and card 2 in advance, and determines that card 1 and card 2 can form at least one DSDA combination in the DSDA mode based on the neighboring frequency points of card 1 and card 2. , adjust the frequency band in which card 1 and card 2 reside according to a certain DSDA combination in at least one DSDA combination, so that card 1 and card 2 reside in the frequency band corresponding to the two cards in the certain DSDA combination.
在方法500中,默认卡1和卡2当前驻留的小区的网络,调整卡1和卡2驻留的频段,以使得双卡间形成DSDA模式。In method 500, the network of the cell where card 1 and card 2 currently reside is defaulted, and the frequency bands where card 1 and card 2 reside are adjusted so that a DSDA mode is formed between the two cards.
在S510中,终端设备确定卡1和卡2已经完成频段的驻留。In S510, the terminal device determines that card 1 and card 2 have completed parking of the frequency band.
在S520中,终端设备确定卡1和卡2之间是否形成DSDA模式。In S520, the terminal device determines whether the DSDA mode is formed between card 1 and card 2.
关于S520的相关描述可参考S420的相关描述,不再赘述。For the relevant description of S520, please refer to the relevant description of S420, which will not be described again.
在S530中,终端设备确定卡1的邻区频点和卡2的邻区频点。In S530, the terminal device determines the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1 and the neighboring cell frequency point of card 2.
关于S530的相关描述可参考S430和S460的相关描述,不再赘述。For the relevant description of S530, please refer to the relevant description of S430 and S460, and will not be described again.
在S540中,终端设备确定卡1的初始候选频段和卡2的初始候选频段。In S540, the terminal device determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 and the initial candidate frequency band of card 2.
在该步骤中,终端设备根据卡1的邻区频点确定卡1的初始候选频段,以及,根据卡2的邻区频点确定卡2的初始候选频段。一个频点对应一个频段,所以,根据邻区频点可以得到每个频点对应的频段,进而得到卡1和卡2的初始候选频段。In this step, the terminal device determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1, and determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 2. One frequency point corresponds to one frequency band. Therefore, the frequency band corresponding to each frequency point can be obtained based on the neighboring cell frequency points, and then the initial candidate frequency bands for Card 1 and Card 2 are obtained.
在终端设备根据卡1的邻区频点确定卡1的初始候选频段的过程中,终端设备根据卡1的邻区频点,确定满足S准则和R准则的卡1的初始候选频段。In the process of the terminal device determining the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1, the terminal device determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 that satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion based on the neighboring cell frequency point of card 1.
具体地,一个小区对应一个频点,一个频点对应一个频段,终端设备从卡1的邻区频点中确定满足S准则和R准则的至少一个邻区对应的至少一个频点(至少一个邻区与至少一个频点一一对应),根据每个频点确定对应的频段,得到至少一个频段,将该至少一个频段统称为卡1的初始候选频段。Specifically, one cell corresponds to one frequency point, and one frequency point corresponds to one frequency band. The terminal device determines from the neighboring cell frequency points of card 1 at least one frequency point corresponding to at least one neighboring cell that satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion (at least one neighboring cell area corresponds one-to-one with at least one frequency point), the corresponding frequency band is determined according to each frequency point, and at least one frequency band is obtained. The at least one frequency band is collectively referred to as the initial candidate frequency band of card 1.
终端设备根据卡2的邻区频点确定卡2的初始候选频段的过程与终端设备根据卡1的邻区频点确定卡1的初始候选频段的过程类似,不再赘述。The process in which the terminal device determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 based on the neighboring cell frequency of card 2 is similar to the process in which the terminal device determines the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 based on the neighboring cell frequency of card 1, and will not be described again.
在S550中,终端设备确定卡1的初始候选频段和卡2的初始候选频段之间是否能够形成终端设备支持的至少一个DSDA组合。每个DSDA组合包括卡1的初始候选频段中的一个频段和卡2的初始候选频段中的一个频段。In S550, the terminal device determines whether at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device can be formed between the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 and the initial candidate frequency band of card 2. Each DSDA combination includes one of the initial candidate frequency bands for Card 1 and one of the initial candidate frequency bands for Card 2.
在该步骤中,终端设备可以根据终端设备的DSDA模式信息,确定两个卡的初始候选频段之间是否能够形成终端设备支持的至少一个DSDA组合。若两个卡的初始候选频段之间能够形成终端设备支持的至少一个DSDA组合,意味着双卡有机会形成DSDA模式,则执行S560;若两个卡的初始候选频段之间无法形成终端设备支持的至少一个DSDA组合,则结束流程。In this step, the terminal device may determine, based on the DSDA mode information of the terminal device, whether at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device can be formed between the initial candidate frequency bands of the two cards. If the initial candidate frequency bands of the two cards can form at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device, which means that the dual cards have the opportunity to form a DSDA mode, then execute S560; if the initial candidate frequency bands of the two cards cannot form a combination supported by the terminal device. At least one DSDA combination, the process ends.
以下,举例说明终端设备确定终端设备支持的至少一个DSDA组合的过程。The following is an example of a process in which the terminal device determines at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device.
假设,卡1驻留在网络1,卡1的初始候选频段包括网络1的3个频段,分别是:频段11、频段12、频段14,卡2驻留在网络2,卡2的初始候选频段包括网络2的2个频段,分别是频段21和频段22,终端设备的DSDA模式信息指示的终端设备支持的所有DSDA组合包括3个DSDA组合,分别是:由“网络1频段11+网络2频段21”形成的DSDA组合1,以及,由“网络1频段12+网络2频段21”形成的DSDA组
合2,由“网络1频段14+网络2频段21”形成的DSDA组合3。因此,卡1的初始候选频段中的频段11和卡2的初始候选频段中的频段21可形成DSDA组合1,卡1的初始候选频段中的频段12和卡2的初始候选频段中的频段21可形成DSDA组合2。所以,卡1的初始候选频段和卡2的初始候选频段能够形成DSDA组合,且可形成2个DSDA组合。Assume that card 1 resides in network 1, and the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 includes three frequency bands of network 1, namely: frequency band 11, frequency band 12, and frequency band 14. Card 2 resides in network 2, and the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 Including 2 frequency bands of network 2, namely frequency band 21 and frequency band 22. All DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device indicated by the DSDA mode information of the terminal device include 3 DSDA combinations, namely: "Network 1 frequency band 11 + Network 2 frequency band" DSDA combination 1 formed by "21", and the DSDA group formed by "Network 1 frequency band 12 + Network 2 frequency band 21" Combined 2, DSDA combination 3 formed by "Network 1 frequency band 14 + Network 2 frequency band 21". Therefore, band 11 in card 1's initial candidate band and band 21 in card 2's initial candidate band may form DSDA combination 1, band 12 in card 1's initial candidate band and band 21 in card 2's initial candidate band DSDA combination 2 can be formed. Therefore, the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 and the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 can form a DSDA combination, and two DSDA combinations can be formed.
在S560中,终端设备根据至少一个DSDA组合中的目标DSDA组合,对卡1和卡2的频段进行调整,以使得卡1和卡2分别驻留在目标DSDA组合中双卡对应的频段上。In S560, the terminal device adjusts the frequency bands of card 1 and card 2 according to the target DSDA combination in at least one DSDA combination, so that card 1 and card 2 respectively reside on the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination.
在该步骤中,终端设备从至少一个DSDA组合中确定目标DSDA组合,根据目标DSDA组合,对卡1和卡2的频段进行调整,即,卡1和卡2均不再驻留在当前频段,而是重新选择频段驻留,卡1和卡2分别驻留在目标DSDA组合中双卡对应的频段。应理解,目标DSDA组合中双卡对应的频段也就是从卡1的初始候选频段中确定出的最终用于卡1驻留的频段以及从卡2的初始候选频段中确定出的最终由于卡2驻留的频段。In this step, the terminal device determines the target DSDA combination from at least one DSDA combination, and adjusts the frequency bands of card 1 and card 2 according to the target DSDA combination, that is, neither card 1 nor card 2 resides in the current frequency band. Instead, the frequency band is reselected to reside. Card 1 and Card 2 respectively reside in the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination. It should be understood that the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination are the frequency band ultimately used for card 1 to reside determined from the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 and the final frequency band determined from the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 due to card 2 Frequency band to stay in.
若至少一个DSDA组合为一个DSDA组合,则目标DSDA组合为这个唯一的DSDA组合。若至少一个DSDA组合为多个DSDA组合,则目标DSDA组合为该多个DSDA组合中的某个DSDA组合,该目标DSDA组合可以是该多个DSDA组合中的任一个DSDA组合,也可以是按照规则确定的DSDA组合,此处不做任何限定。If at least one DSDA combination is a DSDA combination, the target DSDA combination is this unique DSDA combination. If at least one DSDA combination is multiple DSDA combinations, the target DSDA combination is a DSDA combination among the multiple DSDA combinations. The target DSDA combination can be any DSDA combination among the multiple DSDA combinations, or it can be based on The DSDA combination determined by the rules is not limited here.
在至少一个DSDA组合包括多个DSDA组合的实施例中,可以将该多个DSDA组合中优先级最高的DSDA组合确定为目标DSDA组合。In an embodiment where at least one DSDA combination includes multiple DSDA combinations, the DSDA combination with the highest priority among the multiple DSDA combinations may be determined as the target DSDA combination.
在一些实施例中,该优先级最高的DSDA组合是该多个DSDA组合中双卡模式的能力最好的组合。In some embodiments, the DSDA combination with the highest priority is the combination with the best dual-SIM mode capability among the multiple DSDA combinations.
该实施例是从双卡模式的能力定义DSDA组合优先级。双卡模式的能力越好,DSDA组合的优先级越高,反之,双卡模式的能力越差,DSDA组合的优先级越低。双卡模式的能力由高到低为:DSDA发射独享>DSDA发射共享>DR-DSDS>DSDS,那么,DSDA组合的优先级由高到低可以为:DSDA发射独享>DSDA发射共享>DR-DSDS>DSDS。This embodiment is to define the DSDA combination priority from the capability of dual-SIM mode. The better the capability of the dual-SIM mode, the higher the priority of the DSDA combination. On the contrary, the worse the capability of the dual-SIM mode, the lower the priority of the DSDA combination. The capabilities of the dual-card mode from high to low are: DSDA transmitter exclusive > DSDA transmitter shared > DR-DSDS > DSDS. Then, the priority of the DSDA combination from high to low can be: DSDA transmitter exclusive > DSDA transmitter shared > DR -DSDS>DSDS.
图6是本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法600的示意性流程图。同上述方法实施例,为了便于描述,以终端设备为例对方法600做详细说明。Figure 6 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method 600 provided by an embodiment of the present application. Similar to the above method embodiments, for convenience of description, method 600 will be described in detail by taking a terminal device as an example.
方法600所示的实施例是终端设备已经驻留小区后进行小区切换(handover)的过程。小区切换是指终端设备从一个小区移动到另一个小区时,为了保持用户的正常通信需进行的信道切换。当邻区的质量满足一定条件时,终端设备可以从当前的服务小区切换至满足要求的邻区中。The embodiment shown in method 600 is a process of cell handover (handover) after the terminal device has camped in a cell. Cell handover refers to the channel switching required to maintain normal communication for users when the terminal equipment moves from one cell to another. When the quality of the neighboring cell meets certain conditions, the terminal device can switch from the current serving cell to a neighboring cell that meets the requirements.
在本申请实施例的小区切换的过程中,通过相关设计尽可能使得需要一个卡切换小区后驻留的频段与另一个卡当前驻留的频段能够形成DSDA模式。在方法600中,默认双卡当前驻留的小区的网络,调整一个卡驻留的频段,以使得双卡间形成DSDA模式。During the cell switching process in this embodiment of the present application, the relevant design is used to ensure that the frequency band where one card resides after switching cells and the frequency band where another card currently resides can form a DSDA mode. In method 600, the network of the cell where the two cards currently reside is defaulted, and the frequency band where one card resides is adjusted so that a DSDA mode is formed between the two cards.
在S610中,终端设备确定卡1和卡2已经完成频段的驻留,且卡1和卡2之间未形成DSDA模式。
In S610, the terminal device determines that card 1 and card 2 have completed parking the frequency band, and no DSDA mode has been formed between card 1 and card 2.
在S620中,网络设备向终端设备发送邻区测量配置信息,用于配置卡1和卡2中其中一个卡的邻区测量。其中,该其中一个卡处于连接态。In S620, the network device sends neighbor cell measurement configuration information to the terminal device, which is used to configure neighbor cell measurement of one of card 1 and card 2. Among them, one of the cards is in the connected state.
在该步骤中,网络设备向终端设备发送邻区测量配置信息,终端设备可以对邻区进行测量,以便于在邻区的频段满足一定条件后能够使得该其中一个卡可以切换至邻区以达到调整该其中一个卡的频段的目的,从而和另一个卡之间形成DSDA模式,该另一个卡是卡1和卡2中除该其中一个卡以外的一个卡。In this step, the network device sends neighboring cell measurement configuration information to the terminal device, and the terminal device can measure the neighboring cell, so that after the frequency band of the neighboring cell meets certain conditions, one of the cards can switch to the neighboring cell to achieve The purpose of adjusting the frequency band of one of the cards is to form a DSDA mode with the other card, which is a card other than one of Card 1 and Card 2.
应理解,在该步骤中,该另一个卡依然驻留在小区的当前频段,不调整该另一个卡的频段,仅尝试将该其中一个卡切换至满足条件的邻区以达到调整该其中一个卡的频段的目的。It should be understood that in this step, the other card still resides in the current frequency band of the cell and does not adjust the frequency band of the other card. It only attempts to switch one of the cards to a neighboring cell that meets the conditions to adjust one of the cards. The purpose of the card's frequency band.
一般情况下,主卡经常性处于连接态,所以,在一示例中,该其中一个卡可以是主卡。此外,当卡1是主卡时,该其中一个卡即为卡1,当卡2是主卡时,该其中一个卡即为卡2。在另一示例中,副卡有时候也处于连接态(例如,副卡执行通话业务),所以,该其中一个卡也可以是副卡。Generally, the main card is always in a connected state, so in an example, one of the cards may be the main card. In addition, when Card 1 is the main card, one of the cards is Card 1, and when Card 2 is the main card, one of the cards is Card 2. In another example, the secondary card is sometimes in a connected state (for example, the secondary card performs call services), so one of the cards can also be the secondary card.
在一些实施例中,邻区测量配置信息包括:多个邻区的多个小区标识,一个邻区对应一个小区标识;用于指示每个邻区对应的用于小区切换的事件的事件信息。In some embodiments, the neighbor cell measurement configuration information includes: multiple cell identifiers of multiple neighbor cells, one neighbor cell corresponding to one cell identifier; event information used to indicate events for cell switching corresponding to each neighbor cell.
其中,每个邻区对应的用于小区切换的事件可以是以下任一个事件:A3事件、A4事件、B1事件或B2事件。A3事件表示与服务小区是同系统同频的邻区的质量高于服务小区的质量的事件。A4事件表示与服务小区是同系统异频的邻区的质量高于一个门限的事件。B1事件表示与服务小区是异系统的邻区的质量高于一个门限的事件。B2事件表示与服务小区是异系统的邻区的质量高于一个门限且服务小区的质量低于另一个门限的事件。一般情况下,用参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)表示邻区的质量,RSRP是无线信号强度的关键参数,是在某个符号内承载参考信号的所有资源粒子(resource element,RE)上接收到的信号功率的平均值。The event used for cell handover corresponding to each neighboring cell may be any of the following events: A3 event, A4 event, B1 event or B2 event. The A3 event represents an event in which the quality of a neighboring cell in the same system and frequency as the serving cell is higher than the quality of the serving cell. The A4 event indicates an event in which the quality of the neighboring cell in the same system and different frequency as the serving cell is higher than a threshold. The B1 event represents an event in which the quality of a neighboring cell in a different system from the serving cell is higher than a threshold. The B2 event represents an event in which the quality of the neighboring cell in a different system from the serving cell is higher than one threshold and the quality of the serving cell is lower than another threshold. Generally, reference signal receiving power (RSRP) is used to represent the quality of neighboring cells. RSRP is a key parameter of wireless signal strength and is all resource elements (resource elements, RE) that carry reference signals within a certain symbol. ) is the average value of the received signal power.
需要说明的是,网络设备在配置邻区测量时,每个邻区对应一个事件,不同邻区对应的事件可以相同也可以不同,具体以服务小区与邻区的关系而定。例如,若一个邻区是服务小区的同系统同频的小区,则网络设备为该邻区配置A3事件。若一个邻区是服务小区的同系统异频的小区,则网络设备为该邻区配置A4事件。It should be noted that when the network device configures neighbor cell measurement, each neighbor cell corresponds to an event. The events corresponding to different neighbor cells can be the same or different, depending on the relationship between the serving cell and the neighbor cell. For example, if a neighboring cell is a cell with the same system and frequency as the serving cell, the network device configures the A3 event for the neighboring cell. If a neighboring cell is a cell of the same system and different frequency of the serving cell, the network device configures the A4 event for the neighboring cell.
在其他实施例中,邻区测量配置信息还可以包括:每个邻区对应的测量报告的测量报告标识。当某个邻区满足切换要求时,可以根据对应的测量报告标识向网络设备上报测量报告。In other embodiments, the neighboring cell measurement configuration information may also include: a measurement report identifier of the measurement report corresponding to each neighboring cell. When a certain neighboring cell meets the handover requirements, a measurement report can be reported to the network device according to the corresponding measurement report identifier.
在S630中,终端设备确定满足预设条件的卡1和卡2中其中一个卡的第一候选频段。In S630, the terminal device determines the first candidate frequency band of one of Card 1 and Card 2 that meets the preset condition.
在该步骤中,终端设备根据邻区测量配置信息,对多个邻区进行测量,确定多个邻区中是否存在满足预设条件的卡1和卡2中其中一个卡的第一候选频段,若存在,则继续执行S640,若不存在,则结束流程。In this step, the terminal device measures multiple neighboring cells according to the neighboring cell measurement configuration information, and determines whether there is a first candidate frequency band for one of card 1 and card 2 that meets the preset conditions in the multiple neighboring cells. If it exists, continue to execute S640; if it does not exist, the process ends.
在一些实施例中,预设条件为:邻区满足用于小区切换的事件,以及,邻区的频段能够和另一个卡当前驻留的频段形成DSDA模式。用于小区切换的事件可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。In some embodiments, the preset conditions are: the neighboring cell meets the events for cell switching, and the frequency band of the neighboring cell can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where another card currently resides. For events used for cell handover, please refer to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
示例性地,实现中,终端设备根据邻区测量配置信息,对多个邻区进行测量,得
到各个邻区的RSRP值,根据各个邻区的RSRP值,先确定RSRP值满足用于小区切换的事件的至少一个邻区,一个邻区对应一个频段(或者一个邻区具有一个频段),将该至少一个邻区对应的至少一个频段称为初始候选频段,终端设备再根据终端设备的DSDA模式信息,从初始候选频段中确定能够和另一个卡当前驻留的频段形成DSDA模式的第一候选频段。关于终端设备的DSDA模式信息的具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。Exemplarily, in implementation, the terminal device measures multiple neighboring cells according to the neighboring cell measurement configuration information, and obtains To the RSRP value of each neighboring cell, according to the RSRP value of each neighboring cell, first determine at least one neighboring cell whose RSRP value satisfies the event used for cell handover. One neighboring cell corresponds to one frequency band (or one neighboring cell has one frequency band), and then At least one frequency band corresponding to the at least one neighboring cell is called an initial candidate frequency band. The terminal device then determines the first candidate from the initial candidate frequency bands that can form a DSDA mode with the frequency band where another card currently resides based on the DSDA mode information of the terminal device. frequency band. For a specific description of the DSDA mode information of the terminal device, please refer to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
应理解,第一候选频段中的频段是初始候选频段中的部分或全部频段。若初始候选频段中的所有频段均能够和另一个卡当前驻留的频段形成终端设备支持的DSDA模式,则第一候选频段的频段为初始候选频段的全部频段;若初始候选频段中的部分频段能够和另一个卡当前驻留的频段形成终端设备支持的DSDA模式,则第一候选频段为初始候选频段中的部分频段。It should be understood that the frequency bands in the first candidate frequency bands are part or all of the initial candidate frequency bands. If all the frequency bands in the initial candidate frequency band can form a DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band currently occupied by another card, the frequency band of the first candidate frequency band is all the frequency bands of the initial candidate frequency band; if some of the frequency bands in the initial candidate frequency band If it can form a DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band currently occupied by another card, then the first candidate frequency band is part of the initial candidate frequency band.
需要说明的是,第一候选频段中的每个频段与另一个卡当前驻留的频段均可形成终端设备支持的一个DSDA组合,例如,第一候选频段包括N个频段,意味着第一候选频段中的N个频段与另一个卡当前驻留的频段可形成终端设备支持的N个DSDA组合。It should be noted that each frequency band in the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band currently occupied by another card can form a DSDA combination supported by the terminal device. For example, the first candidate frequency band includes N frequency bands, which means that the first candidate frequency band N frequency bands in the frequency band and the frequency band where another card currently resides can form N DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device.
在S640中,终端设备从第一候选频段中确定目标频段。In S640, the terminal device determines the target frequency band from the first candidate frequency band.
若第一候选频段包括一个频段,则将这个唯一的频段确定为目标频段。If the first candidate frequency band includes one frequency band, this unique frequency band is determined as the target frequency band.
若第一候选频段包括多个频段,则将该多个频段中的某个频段确定为目标频段,该目标频段可以是该多个频段中的任一个频段,也可以是按照规则确定的某个频段,此处不做任何限定。If the first candidate frequency band includes multiple frequency bands, then a certain frequency band among the multiple frequency bands is determined as the target frequency band. The target frequency band can be any one of the multiple frequency bands, or it can be a certain frequency band determined according to the rules. Frequency band, there is no limitation here.
在第一候选频段包括多个频段的实施例中,终端设备将第一候选频段中优先级最高的频段确定为目标频段。In the embodiment where the first candidate frequency band includes multiple frequency bands, the terminal device determines the frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands as the target frequency band.
在一些实施例中,该优先级最高的频段是第一候选频段中与另一个卡当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段。也就是说,第一候选频段中与另一个卡当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段为目标频段。In some embodiments, the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where another card currently resides. That is to say, the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability among the DSDA modes formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where another card currently resides is the target frequency band.
在另一些实施例中,该优先级最高的频段是第一候选频段中信号最强的频段。也就是说,第一候选频段中信号最强的频段为目标频段。In other embodiments, the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands. That is to say, the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands is the target frequency band.
需要说明的是,上述第一候选频段中频段的优先级可以单独使用,也可以结合使用。It should be noted that the priority of the frequency bands in the above-mentioned first candidate frequency band can be used alone or in combination.
关于上述从第一候选频段中确定目标频段中的具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。For the specific description of determining the target frequency band from the first candidate frequency band, reference may be made to the relevant description above, and no further description will be given.
在S650中,终端设备向网络设备发送测量报告,测量报告用于指示目标频段。In S650, the terminal device sends a measurement report to the network device, where the measurement report is used to indicate the target frequency band.
在该步骤中,终端设备生成用于指示目标频段的测量报告,且发送给网络设备。In this step, the terminal device generates a measurement report indicating the target frequency band and sends it to the network device.
应理解,测量报告可以隐性地指示该目标频段,也可以显性地指示该目标频段,本申请实施例不做任何限定。It should be understood that the measurement report may indicate the target frequency band implicitly or explicitly indicate the target frequency band, and this embodiment of the present application does not impose any limitation.
在一示例中,测量报告可以隐性指示该目标频段。隐性指示,表示通过测量报告并不会直接读取到目标频段,而是通过读取的内容结合其他信息进而可以得到目标频段。例如,实现中,邻区测量配置信息可以包括每个邻区对应的测量报告标识,当某个邻区满足切换要求时,可以根据对应的测量报告标识向网络设备上报测量报告。对
于具有目标频段的邻区(记为邻区1)而言,当满足切换要求时,根据邻区1对应的测量报告标识向网络设备上报测量报告(记为测量报告1),测量报告1中不包括目标频段,不过,网络设备基于测量报告1的测量报告标识可以确定测量报告1对应的小区是邻区1,也自然确定了邻区1对应的目标频段。In one example, the measurement report may implicitly indicate the target frequency band. Implicit indication means that the target frequency band will not be directly read through the measurement report, but the target frequency band can be obtained by combining the read content with other information. For example, in implementation, the neighboring cell measurement configuration information may include the measurement report identification corresponding to each neighboring cell. When a certain neighboring cell meets the handover requirements, the measurement report may be reported to the network device according to the corresponding measurement report identification. right For the neighboring cell with the target frequency band (denoted as neighboring cell 1), when the handover requirements are met, a measurement report (denoted as measurement report 1) is reported to the network device according to the measurement report identifier corresponding to neighboring cell 1. In the measurement report 1 The target frequency band is not included. However, the network device can determine that the cell corresponding to measurement report 1 is neighboring cell 1 based on the measurement report identifier of measurement report 1, and naturally determines the target frequency band corresponding to neighboring cell 1.
在S660中,网络设备发送切换指示,用于指示将其中一个卡驻留的频段切换至目标频段上。In S660, the network device sends a switching instruction to instruct the frequency band where one of the cards resides to be switched to the target frequency band.
在S670中,终端设备将卡1和卡2中的其中一个卡切换至目标频段上。In S670, the terminal device switches one of card 1 and card 2 to the target frequency band.
在该步骤中,终端设备基于网络设备发送的切换指示,将卡1和卡2中的其中一个卡从当前驻留的频段切换至目标频段上,实现了对该其中一个卡的频段的调整。这样,卡1和卡2之间便形成了DSDA模式,提高了用户体验。In this step, the terminal device switches one of the cards 1 and 2 from the current frequency band to the target frequency band based on the switching instruction sent by the network device, thereby realizing the adjustment of the frequency band of one of the cards. In this way, a DSDA mode is formed between card 1 and card 2, which improves user experience.
应理解,上述方法600中步骤的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。例如,S620与S610可以调换顺序。It should be understood that the size of the sequence numbers of the steps in the above method 600 does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application. For example, the order of S620 and S610 can be reversed.
需要说明的是,上文中各个方法的实施例中采用了初始候选频段、第一候选频段、目标频段,预设条件等的描述,在不同方法的实施例中每个术语的具体含义略有差异,以各个方法中具体场景的含义为准。例如,在方法300中,初始候选频段和第一候选频段是针对卡2的初始候选频段和第一候选频段,在方法400中,初始候选频段和第一候选频段既是针对卡1的初始候选频段和第一候选频段,也可以是针对卡2的初始候选频段和第一候选频段,在方法600中,初始候选频段和第一候选频段是针对卡1和卡2的其中一个卡的初始候选频段和第一候选频段。It should be noted that in the embodiments of each method above, descriptions of initial candidate frequency band, first candidate frequency band, target frequency band, preset conditions, etc. are used. The specific meaning of each term in the embodiments of different methods is slightly different. , subject to the meaning of specific scenarios in each method. For example, in method 300, the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band are the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band for card 2, and in method 400, the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band are both the initial candidate frequency band for card 1 and the first candidate frequency band, which may also be the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band for card 2. In method 600, the initial candidate frequency band and the first candidate frequency band are the initial candidate frequency bands for one of card 1 and card 2. and the first candidate frequency band.
图7是本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法700的示意性流程图。该方法700可由支持双卡通信的终端设备执行,也可由终端设备中的芯片执行,本申请实施例不做任何限定。为了便于描述,以终端设备为例对方法700做详细说明。Figure 7 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method 700 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method 700 can be executed by a terminal device that supports dual-SIM communication, or by a chip in the terminal device. The embodiments of this application do not impose any limitations. For ease of description, method 700 will be described in detail by taking a terminal device as an example.
应理解,在方法700中,第一卡为待调整或待驻留频段的卡,第二卡为已经完成频段驻留且不调整频段的卡。第一卡可以为主卡和副卡中的一个卡,第二卡为主卡和副卡中的另一个卡。示例性地,第一卡为副卡,第二卡为主卡,以减少由于调整频段对主卡的业务造成的影响。It should be understood that in method 700, the first card is a card whose frequency band needs to be adjusted or to be parked, and the second card is a card that has completed the frequency band parking and does not adjust the frequency band. The first card can be one of the main card and the secondary card, and the second card can be the other card of the main card and the secondary card. For example, the first card is the secondary card and the second card is the primary card to reduce the impact of frequency band adjustment on the primary card's services.
在S710中,在终端设备的第一卡和第二卡间未形成双卡双通DSDA模式的情况下,终端设备确定满足预设条件的该第一卡的第一候选频段,该第一候选频段包括一个或多个频段,该预设条件包括第一条件和第二条件,该第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足要求,该第二条件包括:候选小区的频段能够和该第二卡当前驻留的频段形成该终端设备支持的DSDA模式,一个候选小区对应一个频段。In S710, when the dual-card dual-pass DSDA mode is not formed between the first card and the second card of the terminal device, the terminal device determines the first candidate frequency band of the first card that meets the preset conditions. The frequency band includes one or more frequency bands. The preset condition includes a first condition and a second condition. The first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements. The second condition includes: the frequency band of the candidate cell can communicate with the second card. The frequency band currently camped on forms the DSDA mode supported by the terminal equipment, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band.
在该步骤中,终端设备会先确定第一卡和第二卡间是否形成DSDA模式,在未形成DSDA模式的情况下,保留第二卡当前驻留的频段,对第一卡的多个候选小区进行测量,一个候选小区对应一个频段,根据该多个候选小区对应的所有频段确定满足预设条件的第一卡的第一候选频段,以尝试对第一卡的频段进行调整,使得第一卡和第二卡间形成DSDA模式。In this step, the terminal device will first determine whether the DSDA mode is formed between the first card and the second card. If the DSDA mode is not formed, the frequency band currently occupied by the second card will be retained, and the multiple candidates of the first card will be The cell performs measurements. One candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band. Based on all the frequency bands corresponding to the plurality of candidate cells, the first candidate frequency band of the first card that meets the preset conditions is determined to try to adjust the frequency band of the first card so that the first DSDA mode is formed between the card and the second card.
实现中,在一些实施例中,终端设备确定满足预设条件的第一卡的第一候选频段的过程可以如下:
In implementation, in some embodiments, the process for the terminal device to determine the first candidate frequency band of the first card that meets the preset conditions may be as follows:
终端设备确定满足该第一条件的该第一卡的初始候选频段,该初始候选频段包括一个或多个频段;The terminal device determines an initial candidate frequency band of the first card that satisfies the first condition, and the initial candidate frequency band includes one or more frequency bands;
终端设备从该初始候选频段中确定满足该第二条件的所述第一候选频段。The terminal device determines the first candidate frequency band that satisfies the second condition from the initial candidate frequency bands.
示例性地,终端设备对第一卡的多个候选小区进行测量,先确定满足第一条件(即,候选小区的质量满足要求)的至少一个候选小区,一个候选小区对应一个频段,将该至少一个候选小区对应的至少一个频段称为初始候选频段,终端设备再根据终端设备的DSDA模式信息,从初始候选频段中确定满足第二条件(即,候选小区的频段能够和第二卡当前驻留的频段形成终端设备支持的DSDA模式)的第一候选频段。For example, the terminal device measures multiple candidate cells of the first card, first determines at least one candidate cell that meets the first condition (that is, the quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements), one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band, and the at least one candidate cell is At least one frequency band corresponding to a candidate cell is called an initial candidate frequency band. The terminal device then determines from the initial candidate frequency bands according to the DSDA mode information of the terminal device that satisfies the second condition (that is, the frequency band of the candidate cell can be compatible with the second card currently camped on). The frequency band forms the first candidate frequency band for the DSDA mode supported by the terminal device).
应理解,第一候选频段中的频段是初始候选频段中的部分或全部频段。若初始候选频段中的所有频段均能够和第二卡当前驻留的频段形成终端设备支持的DSDA模式,则第一候选频段的频段为初始候选频段的全部频段;若初始候选频段中的部分频段能够和第二卡当前驻留的频段形成终端设备支持的DSDA模式,则第一候选频段为初始候选频段中的部分频段。It should be understood that the frequency bands in the first candidate frequency bands are part or all of the initial candidate frequency bands. If all the frequency bands in the initial candidate frequency band can form the DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band where the second card currently resides, the frequency band of the first candidate frequency band is all the frequency bands of the initial candidate frequency band; if some of the frequency bands in the initial candidate frequency band If it can form a DSDA mode supported by the terminal device with the frequency band currently occupied by the second card, then the first candidate frequency band is part of the initial candidate frequency band.
需要说明的是,第一候选频段中的每个频段与第二卡当前驻留的频段均可形成终端设备支持的一个DSDA组合,例如,第一候选频段包括N个频段,意味着第一候选频段中的N个频段与第二卡当前驻留的频段可形成终端设备支持的N个DSDA组合。It should be noted that each frequency band in the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band currently occupied by the second card can form a DSDA combination supported by the terminal device. For example, the first candidate frequency band includes N frequency bands, which means that the first candidate frequency band The N frequency bands in the frequency band and the frequency band where the second card currently resides can form N DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device.
DSDA模式信息用于指示终端设备支持的能够形成DSDA模式的所有DSDA组合,每个DSDA组合包括双卡的网络类型和频段。实现中,可以在终端设备中预配置DSDA模式信息。DSDA mode information is used to indicate all DSDA combinations supported by the terminal device that can form a DSDA mode. Each DSDA combination includes the network type and frequency band of the dual card. During implementation, DSDA mode information can be pre-configured in the terminal device.
应理解,同一个终端设备支持的DSDA组合是固定的,不同终端设备支持的DSDA组合可以相同也可以不同,具体可以根据终端设备的型号或硬件信息确定。具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。It should be understood that the DSDA combinations supported by the same terminal device are fixed, and the DSDA combinations supported by different terminal devices may be the same or different. The details may be determined based on the model or hardware information of the terminal device. For specific description, please refer to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
在S720中,终端设备根据该第一候选频段中的目标频段,将该第一卡驻留在该目标频段上。In S720, the terminal device camps the first card on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band.
若第一候选频段包括一个频段,则将这个唯一的频段确定为目标频段。若第一候选频段包括多个频段,则将该多个频段中的某个频段确定为目标频段,该目标频段可以是该多个频段中的任一个频段,也可以是按照规则确定的某个频段,此处不做任何限定。If the first candidate frequency band includes one frequency band, this unique frequency band is determined as the target frequency band. If the first candidate frequency band includes multiple frequency bands, then a certain frequency band among the multiple frequency bands is determined as the target frequency band. The target frequency band can be any one of the multiple frequency bands, or it can be a certain frequency band determined according to the rules. Frequency band, there is no limitation here.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,保留第二卡当前驻留的频段,基于预设条件确定第一卡的第一候选频段,得到的第一候选频段既能满足质量要求也能和第二卡当前驻留的频段形成DSDA模式,进而从第一候选频段中选择一个频段作为目标频段,促使第一卡驻留在目标频段上,可以使得第一卡和第二卡间形成DSDA模式,从而,能够使得终端设备处于DSDA模式,提高了用户体验。此外,由于本申请实施例保留了第二卡当前驻留的频段仅干涉了第一卡需要驻留的频段,相比于对两个卡的频段均需进行调整的方式,本申请实施例更易实现,且一定程度上降低了由于调整频段可能导致的业务中断给用户带来的影响。The dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application retains the frequency band currently occupied by the second card, and determines the first candidate frequency band of the first card based on preset conditions. The obtained first candidate frequency band can not only meet the quality requirements but also be compatible with The frequency band where the second card currently resides forms a DSDA mode, and then a frequency band is selected from the first candidate frequency band as the target frequency band, prompting the first card to reside on the target frequency band, which can form a DSDA mode between the first card and the second card , thereby enabling the terminal device to be in DSDA mode, improving user experience. In addition, since the embodiment of the present application retains the frequency band where the second card currently resides and only interferes with the frequency band where the first card needs to reside, compared with the method of adjusting the frequency bands of both cards, the embodiment of the present application is easier Realize, and reduce to a certain extent the impact on users of service interruptions that may be caused by adjusting the frequency band.
在第一候选频段包括多个频段的实施例中,在该根据该第一候选频段中的目标频段,将该第一卡驻留在该目标频段上之前,方法700还包括:终端设备将该第一候选频段中优先级最高的频段确定为该目标频段。
In an embodiment in which the first candidate frequency band includes multiple frequency bands, before the first card is camped on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, the method 700 further includes: the terminal device sets the target frequency band. The frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands is determined as the target frequency band.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,若基于预设条件确定的第一候选频段包括多个频段,终端设备将第一候选频段中优先级最高的频段作为目标频段,保留第二卡当前驻留的频段,将第一卡驻留在该目标频段上,能够使得第一卡和第二卡之间形成的DSDA模式是终端设备设定的最优模式,提高了双卡模式的性能。In the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application, if the first candidate frequency band determined based on preset conditions includes multiple frequency bands, the terminal device uses the frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands as the target frequency band, and retains the current frequency band of the second card. Parking the first card in the target frequency band can make the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card the optimal mode set by the terminal device, improving the performance of the dual-card mode.
在一些实施例中,该优先级最高的频段是该第一候选频段中与该第二卡当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段。也就是说,第一候选频段中与第二卡当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段为目标频段。In some embodiments, the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where the second card currently resides. That is to say, the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where the second card currently resides is the target frequency band.
该实施例是从双卡模式的能力定义第一候选频段中频段的优先级的,具体描述可参考上文S330中关于卡2的第一候选频段中频段的优先级的相关描述,不再赘述,将上文的卡2替换为这里的第一卡以及将上文的卡1替换为这里的第二卡即可。This embodiment defines the priority of the frequency band in the first candidate frequency band based on the capability of the dual-card mode. For specific description, please refer to the relevant description of the priority of the frequency band in the first candidate frequency band of card 2 in S330 above, which will not be described again. , just replace card 2 above with the first card here and card 1 above with the second card here.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,终端设备通过将第一候选频段中与第二卡当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段作为优先级最高的频段,保留第二卡当前驻留的频段,将第一卡驻留在该优先级最高的频段上,能够使得第一卡和第二卡之间形成的DSDA模式是性能最优的双卡模式,用户的体验最好。In the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device uses the frequency band with the best dual-card mode capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where the second card currently resides as the frequency band with the highest priority. , retaining the frequency band where the second card currently resides, and parking the first card on the frequency band with the highest priority, can make the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card a dual-card mode with the best performance. User experience is the best.
在另一些实施例中,该优先级最高的频段是该第一候选频段中信号最强的频段。也就是说,第一候选频段中信号最强的频段为目标频段。In other embodiments, the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the strongest signal in the first candidate frequency band. That is to say, the frequency band with the strongest signal among the first candidate frequency bands is the target frequency band.
该实施例是从频段的信号强度定义第一候选频段中频段的优先级的。具体描述可参考上文S330中关于卡2的第一候选频段中频段的优先级的相关描述,不再赘述,将上文的卡2替换为这里的第一卡以及将上文的卡1替换为这里的第二卡即可。In this embodiment, the priority of the frequency band in the first candidate frequency band is defined based on the signal strength of the frequency band. For specific description, please refer to the relevant description of the priority of the frequency band in the first candidate frequency band of card 2 in S330 above. No further details will be given. Replace the above card 2 with the first card here and replace the above card 1. Just the second card here.
需要说明的是,上述定义的第一卡的第一候选频段中频段的优先级可以单独使用,也可以结合使用,具体描述参考上文S330中的相关描述,不再赘述。It should be noted that the priority of the frequency band in the first candidate frequency band of the first card defined above can be used alone or in combination. For specific description, please refer to the relevant description in S330 above, which will not be described again.
在本申请实施例中,预设条件是用于确定第一卡的第一候选频段的判定条件,预设条件中的第一条件与候选小区的质量有关,包括:候选小区的质量满足要求。当终端设备处于不同场景中,第一条件的具体内容不同,对应的场景下的实现过程也不同。In this embodiment of the present application, the preset condition is a judgment condition used to determine the first candidate frequency band of the first card. The first condition in the preset condition is related to the quality of the candidate cell, including: the quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements. When the terminal device is in different scenarios, the specific content of the first condition is different, and the implementation process in the corresponding scenario is also different.
在终端设备进行开机选小区的场景中,第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足S准则。关于S准则的具体描述可参考上文方法300中的相关描述,不再赘述。In the scenario where the terminal equipment is powered on and selected for a cell, the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell satisfies the S criterion. For specific description of the S criterion, please refer to the relevant description in the method 300 above, and will not be described again.
在该场景的实施例中,候选小区的质量可以通过候选小区的接收功率Srxlev和接收信号的信号质量Squal表示。In an embodiment of this scenario, the quality of the candidate cell may be represented by the received power Srxlev of the candidate cell and the signal quality Squal of the received signal.
结合上文,在终端设备进行开机选小区的场景中,本申请实施例的实现过程可以对应上文方法300的实现过程。第一卡可以为上文方法300中的卡2,第二卡可以为上文方法300的卡1,第一卡的第一候选频段可以为方法300中卡2的第一候选频段,确定第一卡的第一候选频段以及确定目标频段的过程的具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。In combination with the above, in the scenario where the terminal device is powered on and selects a cell, the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application can correspond to the implementation process of method 300 above. The first card may be card 2 in the above method 300, and the second card may be card 1 in the above method 300. The first candidate frequency band of the first card may be the first candidate frequency band of card 2 in the method 300. Determine the first For a detailed description of the first candidate frequency band of the card and the process of determining the target frequency band, please refer to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
应理解,在终端设备进行开机选小区的场景中,第二卡已经完成频段的驻留,第一卡还未进行频段的驻留。It should be understood that in the scenario where the terminal device is powered on and selects a cell, the second card has completed parking on the frequency band, and the first card has not yet completed parking on the frequency band.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,在终端设备进行开机选小区的场景中,在现有的候选小区的质量满足S准则的第一条件的基础上,增加了用于使得双卡形成DSDA模式的第二条件,对现有流程做了优化改进,改动较少,在能够使得终端设备处于DSDA模式的情况下,更易于实现。The dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application, in the scenario where the terminal device is powered on to select a cell, on the basis that the quality of the existing candidate cells meets the first condition of the S criterion, an additional feature is added to enable dual-card formation. The second condition of DSDA mode is to optimize and improve the existing process with fewer changes. It is easier to implement when the terminal equipment can be placed in DSDA mode.
在终端设备进行小区重选的场景中,第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足S准则和R
准则。关于S准则和R准则的具体描述可参考上文方法400的相关描述,不再赘述。In the scenario where the terminal equipment performs cell reselection, the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell satisfies the S criterion and R guidelines. For specific descriptions of the S criterion and the R criterion, please refer to the relevant description of the method 400 above, and will not be described again.
在该场景的实施例中,候选小区的质量可以通过候选小区的接收功率Srxlev、接收信号的信号质量Squal和RSRP来表示。需要说明的是,这里的候选小区为第一卡驻留的服务小区的邻区。In the embodiment of this scenario, the quality of the candidate cell may be represented by the received power Srxlev of the candidate cell, the signal quality Squal and RSRP of the received signal. It should be noted that the candidate cell here is a neighboring cell of the serving cell where the first card is camped.
结合上文,在终端设备进行小区重选的场景中,本申请实施例的实现过程可以对应上文方法400的实现过程。In combination with the above, in the scenario where the terminal device performs cell reselection, the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the implementation process of the above method 400.
在第一种情况中,第一卡可以为上文方法400中的卡1,第二卡可以为上文方法400的卡2,第一卡的第一候选频段可以为方法400中卡1的第一候选频段,该情况中的预设频段为S440中的预设频段1,该情况中的目标频段为S450中的目标频段1,确定第一卡的第一候选频段以及确定目标频段的过程的具体描述可参考S430至S450的相关描述,不再赘述。In the first case, the first card can be card 1 in the above method 400, the second card can be the card 2 in the above method 400, and the first candidate frequency band of the first card can be the card 1 in the method 400. The first candidate frequency band, the preset frequency band in this case is the preset frequency band 1 in S440, the target frequency band in this case is the target frequency band 1 in S450, the process of determining the first candidate frequency band of the first card and determining the target frequency band For detailed description, please refer to the relevant descriptions of S430 to S450, and will not be described again.
在第二种情况中,第一卡可以为上文方法400中的卡2,第二卡可以为上文方法400的卡1,第一卡的第一候选频段可以为方法400中卡2的第一候选频段,该情况中的预设频段为S470中的预设频段2,该情况中的目标频段为S480中的目标频段2,确定第一卡的第一候选频段以及确定目标频段的过程的具体描述可参考S460至S480的相关描述,不再赘述。In the second case, the first card can be card 2 in the above method 400, the second card can be the card 1 in the above method 400, and the first candidate frequency band of the first card can be the card 2 in the method 400. The first candidate frequency band, the preset frequency band in this case is the preset frequency band 2 in S470, the target frequency band in this case is the target frequency band 2 in S480, the process of determining the first candidate frequency band of the first card and determining the target frequency band For detailed description, please refer to the relevant descriptions from S460 to S480, and will not be described again.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,在终端设备进行小区重选的场景中,在现有的候选小区的质量满足S准则和R准则的第一条件的基础上,增加了用于使得双卡形成DSDA模式的第二条件,对现有流程做了优化改进,改动较少,在能够使得终端设备处于DSDA模式的情况下,更易于实现。The dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application, in the scenario where the terminal device performs cell reselection, on the basis that the quality of the existing candidate cells meets the first condition of the S criterion and the R criterion, is added for making the The second condition for dual cards to form DSDA mode is to optimize and improve the existing process with fewer changes. It is easier to implement when the terminal device can be in DSDA mode.
在终端设备进行小区切换的场景中,第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足用于小区切换的事件,该用于小区切换的事件包括A3事件、A4事件、B1事件或B2事件中任一个。关于A3事件、A4事件、B1事件和B2事件的具体描述可参考上文方法600中的相关描述,不再赘述。In the scenario where the terminal device performs cell switching, the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell satisfies the event used for cell switching, and the event used for cell switching includes any one of A3 event, A4 event, B1 event or B2 event. For specific descriptions of the A3 event, the A4 event, the B1 event and the B2 event, please refer to the relevant descriptions in the method 600 above, and will not be described again.
在该场景的实施例中,候选小区的质量可以通过RSRP来表示。需要说明的是,这里的候选小区为第一卡驻留的服务小区的邻区。In an embodiment of this scenario, the quality of the candidate cell may be represented by RSRP. It should be noted that the candidate cell here is a neighboring cell of the serving cell where the first card is camped.
结合上文,在终端设备进行小区切换的场景中,本申请实施例的实现过程可以对应上文方法600的实现过程。第一卡可以为上文方法600中的卡1和卡2中其中一个卡,第二卡可以为上文方法600的卡1和卡2中的另一个卡,第一卡的第一候选频段可以为方法600中其中一个卡的第一候选频段,确定第一卡的第一候选频段以及确定目标频段的过程的具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。In combination with the above, in the scenario where the terminal device performs cell switching, the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the implementation process of the above method 600. The first card can be one of card 1 and card 2 in the above method 600, and the second card can be the other card in the above method 600. The first candidate frequency band of the first card It may be the first candidate frequency band of one of the cards in the method 600. For a detailed description of the process of determining the first candidate frequency band of the first card and determining the target frequency band, please refer to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,在终端设备进行小区切换的场景中,在现有的候选小区的质量满足用于小区切换的事件的第一条件的基础上,增加了用于使得双卡形成DSDA模式的第二条件,对现有流程做了优化改进,改动较少,在能够使得终端设备处于DSDA模式的情况下,更易于实现。The dual-SIM communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application adds an additional function for making the cell switch happen on the basis that the quality of the existing candidate cells meets the first condition for the cell switch event in the scenario where the terminal device performs cell handover. The second condition for dual cards to form DSDA mode is to optimize and improve the existing process with fewer changes. It is easier to implement when the terminal device can be in DSDA mode.
在终端设备进行小区切换的场景中,在一些实施例中,该根据该第一候选频段中的目标频段,将该第一卡驻留在所述目标频段上之前,方法700还包括:In the scenario where the terminal device performs cell switching, in some embodiments, before parking the first card on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, method 700 further includes:
终端设备向网络设备发送用于指示该目标频段的测量报告;The terminal device sends a measurement report indicating the target frequency band to the network device;
接收来自该网络设备的切换指示,该切换指示用于指示该终端设备将该第一卡驻留的
频段切换至该目标频段上。Receive a switching instruction from the network device, where the switching instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to store the first card. The frequency band is switched to the target frequency band.
关于该步骤的具体描述可参考方法600中S650和S660的相关描述,不再赘述。For a detailed description of this step, please refer to the relevant description of S650 and S660 in method 600, which will not be described again.
在终端设备进行小区重选和小区切换的场景中,第一卡和第二卡均已经完成频段的驻留,只不过由于双卡间未形成DSDA模式,需要对第一卡的频段进行调整。因此,在这两种场景中,该根据该第一候选频段中的目标频段,将该第一卡驻留在该目标频段上,包括:In the scenario where the terminal equipment performs cell reselection and cell switching, both the first card and the second card have completed the frequency band parking. However, since the DSDA mode is not formed between the two cards, the frequency band of the first card needs to be adjusted. Therefore, in these two scenarios, the first card is camped on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, including:
根据该目标频段,对该第一卡的频段进行调整,以使得该第一卡驻留在该目标频段上。According to the target frequency band, the frequency band of the first card is adjusted so that the first card resides on the target frequency band.
图8是本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法800的示意性流程图。该方法800可由支持双卡通信的终端设备执行,也可由终端设备中的芯片执行,本申请实施例不做任何限定。为了便于描述,以终端设备为例对方法800做详细说明。Figure 8 is a schematic flow chart of a dual-card communication method 800 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method 800 can be executed by a terminal device that supports dual-SIM communication or by a chip in the terminal device. The embodiments of this application do not impose any limitations. For ease of description, method 800 will be described in detail by taking a terminal device as an example.
方法800描述的是终端设备进行小区重选时通过调整第一卡和第二卡的频段,以使得第一卡和第二卡间形成DSDA模式,可对应上文的方法500。第一卡可以为主卡和副卡中的一个卡,第二卡为主卡和副卡中的另一个卡。Method 800 describes that when the terminal device performs cell reselection, it adjusts the frequency bands of the first card and the second card so that a DSDA mode is formed between the first card and the second card, which can correspond to the above method 500. The first card can be one of the main card and the secondary card, and the second card can be the other card of the main card and the secondary card.
在S810中,在终端设备的第一卡和第二卡间未形成双卡双通DSDA模式的情况下,终端设备确定满足第一预设条件的该第一卡的候选频段和满足第二预设条件的该第二卡的候选频段,该第一卡的候选频段包括至少一个频段,该第二卡的候选频段包括至少一个频段,该第一预设条件包括:针对该第一卡的候选小区满足S准则和R准则,该第二预设条件包括:针对该第二卡的候选小区满足S准则和R准则,一个候选小区对应一个频段。In S810, when the dual-card dual-pass DSDA mode is not formed between the first card and the second card of the terminal device, the terminal device determines the candidate frequency band of the first card that satisfies the first preset condition and the candidate frequency band that satisfies the second preset condition. Assuming that the candidate frequency band of the second card is conditional, the candidate frequency band of the first card includes at least one frequency band, the candidate frequency band of the second card includes at least one frequency band, and the first preset condition includes: for the candidate of the first card The cell satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion. The second preset condition includes: the candidate cell for the second card satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band.
应理解,第一卡的候选小区为第一卡驻留的服务小区的邻区,第二卡的候选小区为第二卡驻留的服务小区的邻区。It should be understood that the candidate cell of the first card is a neighboring cell of the serving cell where the first card is camped, and the candidate cell of the second card is a neighboring cell of the serving cell where the second card is camped.
在该步骤中,终端设备会先确定第一卡和第二卡间是否形成DSDA模式,在未形成DSDA模式的情况下,分别对第一卡的多个候选小区和第二卡的多个候选小区进行测量,一个候选小区对应一个频段,根据第一卡的多个候选小区对应的所有频段确定满足第一预设条件的第一卡的候选频段,根据第二卡的多个候选小区对应的所有频段确定满足第二预设条件的第二卡的候选频段。In this step, the terminal device will first determine whether a DSDA mode is formed between the first card and the second card. If the DSDA mode is not formed, the terminal device will separately compare multiple candidate cells of the first card and multiple candidates of the second card. Cells are measured. One candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band. Based on all the frequency bands corresponding to multiple candidate cells of the first card, the candidate frequency band of the first card that meets the first preset condition is determined. According to the multiple candidate cells of the second card, the candidate frequency band is determined. All frequency bands determine candidate frequency bands of the second card that meet the second preset condition.
该步骤的具体实现过程与上文方法500中S540类似,具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。其中,这里的第一卡的候选频段对应上文方法500中的卡1的初始候选频段,这里的第二卡的候选频段对应上文方法500中的卡2的初始候选频段,下文关于两者的关系的解释同此处,不再赘述。The specific implementation process of this step is similar to S540 in the above method 500. For specific description, please refer to the relevant description above and will not be described again. Among them, the candidate frequency band of the first card here corresponds to the initial candidate frequency band of card 1 in the above method 500, and the candidate frequency band of the second card here corresponds to the initial candidate frequency band of card 2 in the above method 500. The following is about the two. The explanation of the relationship is the same as here and will not be repeated.
在S820中,终端设备从该第一卡的候选频段和该第二卡的候选频段中,确定该终端设备支持的能够形成DSDA模式的至少一个DSDA组合,每个DSDA组合包括该第一卡的候选频段中的一个频段和该第二卡的候选频段中的一个频段。In S820, the terminal device determines from the candidate frequency band of the first card and the candidate frequency band of the second card that the terminal device supports at least one DSDA combination that can form a DSDA mode, and each DSDA combination includes the first card's candidate frequency band. One of the candidate frequency bands and one of the candidate frequency bands of the second card.
在该步骤中,终端设备可以根据终端设备的DSDA模式信息,确定第一卡的候选频段和第二卡的候选频段之间是否能够形成终端设备支持的至少一个DSDA组合。若两个卡的候选频段之间能够形成终端设备支持的至少一个DSDA组合,意味着双卡有机会形成DSDA模式,则执行SS830;若两个卡的候选频段之间无法形成终端设备支持的至少一个DSDA组合,则结束流程。In this step, the terminal device may determine, based on the DSDA mode information of the terminal device, whether at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device can be formed between the candidate frequency band of the first card and the candidate frequency band of the second card. If the candidate frequency bands of the two cards can form at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device, which means that the dual cards have the opportunity to form a DSDA mode, then execute SS830; if the candidate frequency bands of the two cards cannot form at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device. A DSDA combination ends the process.
该步骤的具体实现过程与上文方法800中S550类似,具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。The specific implementation process of this step is similar to S550 in method 800 above. For specific description, please refer to the relevant description above and will not be described again.
在S830中,终端设备根据该至少一个DSDA组合中的目标DSDA组合,对该第一卡
和该第二卡的频段进行调整,以使得该第一卡和该第二卡分别驻留在所述目标DSDA组合中双卡对应的频段上。In S830, the terminal device determines the first card based on the target DSDA combination in the at least one DSDA combination. The frequency bands of the first card and the second card are adjusted so that the first card and the second card respectively reside on the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination.
在该步骤中,终端设备从至少一个DSDA组合中确定目标DSDA组合,根据目标DSDA组合,对第一卡和第一卡的频段进行调整,即,第一卡和第一卡均不再驻留在当前频段,而是重新选择频段驻留,第一卡和第一卡分别驻留在目标DSDA组合中双卡对应的频段。应理解,目标DSDA组合中双卡对应的频段也就是从第一卡的候选频段中确定出的最终用于第一卡驻留的频段以及从第二卡的候选频段中确定出的最终由于第二卡驻留的频段。In this step, the terminal device determines the target DSDA combination from at least one DSDA combination, and adjusts the frequency band of the first card and the first card according to the target DSDA combination, that is, the first card and the first card are no longer resident. In the current frequency band, the frequency band is reselected to reside. The first card and the first card respectively reside in the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination. It should be understood that the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination are the frequency bands ultimately used for the first card to reside determined from the candidate frequency bands of the first card and the final frequency bands determined from the candidate frequency bands of the second card due to the third card. The frequency band where the second card resides.
若至少一个DSDA组合为一个DSDA组合,则目标DSDA组合为这个唯一的DSDA组合。若至少一个DSDA组合为多个DSDA组合,则目标DSDA组合为该多个DSDA组合中的某个DSDA组合,该目标DSDA组合可以是该多个DSDA组合中的任一个DSDA组合,也可以是按照规则确定的DSDA组合,此处不做任何限定。If at least one DSDA combination is a DSDA combination, the target DSDA combination is this unique DSDA combination. If at least one DSDA combination is multiple DSDA combinations, the target DSDA combination is a DSDA combination among the multiple DSDA combinations. The target DSDA combination can be any DSDA combination among the multiple DSDA combinations, or it can be based on The DSDA combination determined by the rules is not limited here.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,基于第一预设条件确定第一卡的候选频段以及第二预设条件确定第二卡的候选频段,得到的两个卡的候选频段均能满足小区重选过程的S准则和R准则,进而对两个卡的候选频段进行自由组合以得到确定终端设备支持的至少一个DSDA组合以及从至少一个DSDA组合选择一个DSDA组合作为目标DSDA,对第一卡和第二卡的频段进行调整,可以使得第一卡和第二卡间形成DSDA模式,从而,能够使得终端设备处于DSDA模式,提高了用户体验。The dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application determines the candidate frequency band of the first card based on the first preset condition and determines the candidate frequency band of the second card based on the second preset condition. The obtained candidate frequency bands of the two cards can both satisfy The S criterion and R criterion of the cell reselection process, and then freely combine the candidate frequency bands of the two cards to obtain at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal equipment and select one DSDA combination from at least one DSDA combination as the target DSDA, for the first Adjusting the frequency bands of the card and the second card can form a DSDA mode between the first card and the second card, thereby making the terminal device in the DSDA mode and improving the user experience.
在一些实施例中,该至少一个DSDA组合包括多个DSDA组合;以及,在该根据所述至少一个DSDA组合中的目标DSDA组合,对该第一卡和该第二卡的频段进行调整之前,方法800还包括:In some embodiments, the at least one DSDA combination includes a plurality of DSDA combinations; and, before adjusting the frequency bands of the first card and the second card according to the target DSDA combination in the at least one DSDA combination, Method 800 also includes:
将该多个DSDA组合中优先级最高的DSDA组合确定为该目标DSDA组合。The DSDA combination with the highest priority among the multiple DSDA combinations is determined as the target DSDA combination.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,若终端设备支持的DSDA组合有多个,可以将优先级最高的DSDA组合作为目标DSDA组合,以对第一卡和第二卡的频段进行调整,能够使得第一卡和第二卡之间形成的DSDA模式是终端设备设定的最优模式,提高了双卡模式的性能。In the dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of this application, if the terminal device supports multiple DSDA combinations, the DSDA combination with the highest priority can be used as the target DSDA combination to adjust the frequency bands of the first card and the second card. The DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card is the optimal mode set by the terminal device, which improves the performance of the dual-card mode.
示例性地,该优先级最高的DSDA组合是该多个DSDA组合中双卡模式的能力最好的组合。For example, the DSDA combination with the highest priority is the combination with the best dual-SIM mode capability among the multiple DSDA combinations.
该实施例是从双卡模式的能力定义DSDA组合优先级。双卡模式的能力越好,DSDA组合的优先级越高,反之,双卡模式的能力越差,DSDA组合的优先级越低。双卡模式的能力由高到低为:DSDA发射独享>DSDA发射共享>DR-DSDS>DSDS,那么,DSDA组合的优先级由高到低可以为:DSDA发射独享>DSDA发射共享>DR-DSDS>DSDS。This embodiment is to define the DSDA combination priority from the capability of dual-SIM mode. The better the capability of the dual-SIM mode, the higher the priority of the DSDA combination. On the contrary, the worse the capability of the dual-SIM mode, the lower the priority of the DSDA combination. The capabilities of the dual-card mode from high to low are: DSDA transmitter exclusive > DSDA transmitter shared > DR-DSDS > DSDS. Then, the priority of the DSDA combination from high to low can be: DSDA transmitter exclusive > DSDA transmitter shared > DR -DSDS>DSDS.
本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,通过将多个DSDA组合中双卡模式的能力最好的组合作为优先级最高的DSDA组合,终端设备根据该优先级最高的DSDA组合对第一卡和第二卡的频段进行调整,能够使得第一卡和第二卡之间形成的DSDA模式是性能最优的双卡模式,用户的体验最好。The dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application uses the combination with the best dual-card mode capability among multiple DSDA combinations as the DSDA combination with the highest priority, and the terminal device compares the first card to the first card based on the DSDA combination with the highest priority. Adjusting the frequency band of the second card can make the DSDA mode formed between the first card and the second card a dual-card mode with the best performance and the best user experience.
需要再次说明的是,上述各方法实施例中步骤的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实
施过程构成任何限定。It should be noted again that the sequence numbers of the steps in the above method embodiments do not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the implementation of the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitations.
以上,结合图1至图8,详细说明了本申请实施例提供的双卡通信的方法,下面将结合图9至图10,详细描述根据本申请实施例提供的终端设备。The dual-card communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is described in detail above with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8 . Next, the terminal device provided according to the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9 to 10 .
图9是本申请实施例提供的终端设备900的示例性框图。该终端设备900包括处理单元910。Figure 9 is an exemplary block diagram of a terminal device 900 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device 900 includes a processing unit 910 .
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备900用于执行上述方法700中终端设备对应的各个流程和步骤。In a possible implementation, the terminal device 900 is used to execute various processes and steps corresponding to the terminal device in the above method 700.
处理单元910用于,在所述终端设备的第一卡和第二卡间未形成双卡双通DSDA模式的情况下,确定满足预设条件的所述第一卡的第一候选频段,所述第一候选频段包括至少一个频段,所述预设条件包括第一条件和第二条件,所述第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足要求,所述第二条件包括:候选小区的频段能够和所述第二卡当前驻留的频段形成所述终端设备支持的DSDA模式,一个候选小区对应一个频段;The processing unit 910 is configured to determine the first candidate frequency band of the first card that meets the preset conditions when the dual-card dual-pass DSDA mode is not formed between the first card and the second card of the terminal device, so The first candidate frequency band includes at least one frequency band, and the preset condition includes a first condition and a second condition. The first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements, and the second condition includes: the frequency band of the candidate cell can The frequency band currently camped by the second card forms the DSDA mode supported by the terminal device, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band;
处理单元910还用于,根据所述第一候选频段中的目标频段,将所述第一卡驻留在所述目标频段上。The processing unit 910 is further configured to park the first card on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band.
应理解,处理单元910可用于执行方法700中终端设备执行的各个步骤,具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。It should be understood that the processing unit 910 may be used to perform various steps performed by the terminal device in the method 700. For specific descriptions, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions above, which will not be described again.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备900用于执行上述方法800中终端设备对应的各个流程和步骤。In another possible implementation, the terminal device 900 is used to execute various processes and steps corresponding to the terminal device in the above method 800.
处理单元910用于,在所述终端设备的第一卡和第二卡间未形成双卡双通DSDA模式的情况下,确定满足第一预设条件的所述第一卡的候选频段和满足第二预设条件的所述第二卡的候选频段,所述第一卡的候选频段包括至少一个频段,所述第二卡的候选频段包括至少一个频段,所述第一预设条件包括:针对所述第一卡的候选小区满足S准则和R准则,所述第二预设条件包括:针对所述第二卡的候选小区满足S准则和R准则,一个候选小区对应一个频段;The processing unit 910 is configured to determine the candidate frequency band of the first card that satisfies the first preset condition and the candidate frequency band of the first card that satisfies the first preset condition when the dual-card dual-pass DSDA mode is not formed between the first card and the second card of the terminal device. The candidate frequency band of the second card according to the second preset condition, the candidate frequency band of the first card includes at least one frequency band, the candidate frequency band of the second card includes at least one frequency band, and the first preset condition includes: The candidate cell for the first card satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion, and the second preset condition includes: the candidate cell for the second card satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band;
处理单元910还用于,从所述第一卡的候选频段和所述第二卡的候选频段中,确定所述终端设备支持的能够形成DSDA模式的至少一个DSDA组合,每个DSDA组合包括所述第一卡的候选频段中的一个频段和所述第二卡的候选频段中的一个频段;The processing unit 910 is further configured to determine, from the candidate frequency band of the first card and the candidate frequency band of the second card, at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device that can form a DSDA mode, and each DSDA combination includes the One frequency band among the candidate frequency bands of the first card and one frequency band among the candidate frequency bands of the second card;
处理单元910还用于,根据所述至少一个DSDA组合中的目标DSDA组合,对所述第一卡和所述第二卡的频段进行调整,以使得所述第一卡和所述第二卡分别驻留在所述目标DSDA组合中双卡对应的频段上。The processing unit 910 is also configured to adjust the frequency bands of the first card and the second card according to the target DSDA combination in the at least one DSDA combination, so that the first card and the second card respectively reside on the frequency bands corresponding to the two cards in the target DSDA combination.
应理解,处理单元910可用于执行方法800中终端设备执行的各个步骤,具体描述可参考上文的相关描述,不再赘述。It should be understood that the processing unit 910 can be used to perform various steps performed by the terminal device in the method 800. For specific descriptions, reference can be made to the relevant descriptions above, which will not be described again.
应理解,这里的终端设备900以功能单元的形式体现。这里的术语“单元”可以指应用特有集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、电子电路、用于执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器(例如共享处理器、专有处理器或组处理器等)和存储器、合并逻辑电路和/或其它支持所描述的功能的合适组件。It should be understood that the terminal device 900 here is embodied in the form of a functional unit. The term "unit" as used herein may refer to an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an electronic circuit, a processor (such as a shared processor, a proprietary processor, or a group of processors) used to execute one or more software or firmware programs. processor, etc.) and memory, merged logic circuitry, and/or other suitable components to support the described functionality.
在本申请的实施例,图9中的终端设备也可以是芯片或者芯片系统,例如:片上系统(system on chip,SoC)。In this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device in Figure 9 may also be a chip or a chip system, such as a system on chip (SoC).
图10本申请实施例提供的终端设备1000的示意性结构图。终端设备1000用于执
行上述方法实施例中对应的各个步骤和/或流程。Figure 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 1000 provided by an embodiment of the present application. Terminal equipment 1000 is used to execute Execute the corresponding steps and/or processes in the above method embodiments.
终端设备1000包括处理器1010、收发器1020和存储器1030。其中,处理器1010、收发器1020和存储器1030通过内部连接通路互相通信,处理器1010可以实现终端设备1000中各种可能的实现方式中处理器1010的功能。存储器1030用于存储指令,处理器1010用于执行存储器1030存储的指令,或者说,处理器1010可以调用这些存储指令实现终端设备1000中处理器1010的功能。The terminal device 1000 includes a processor 1010, a transceiver 1020, and a memory 1030. Among them, the processor 1010, the transceiver 1020 and the memory 1030 communicate with each other through internal connection paths. The processor 1010 can implement the functions of the processor 1010 in various possible implementations in the terminal device 1000. The memory 1030 is used to store instructions, and the processor 1010 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 1030. In other words, the processor 1010 can call these stored instructions to implement the functions of the processor 1010 in the terminal device 1000.
可选地,该存储器1030可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器,并向处理器提供指令和数据。存储器的一部分还可以包括非易失性随机存取存储器。例如,存储器还可以存储设备类型的信息。该处理器1010可以用于执行存储器中存储的指令,并且当该处理器1010执行存储器中存储的指令时,该处理器1010用于执行上述与终端设备对应的方法实施例的各个步骤和/或流程。Optionally, the memory 1030 may include read-only memory and random access memory and provide instructions and data to the processor. A portion of the memory may also include non-volatile random access memory. For example, the memory may also store device type information. The processor 1010 may be used to execute instructions stored in the memory, and when the processor 1010 executes the instructions stored in the memory, the processor 1010 is used to execute each step of the above method embodiment corresponding to the terminal device and/or process.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备1000用于执行上述方法700中终端设备对应的各个流程和步骤。In a possible implementation, the terminal device 1000 is configured to execute various processes and steps corresponding to the terminal device in the above method 700.
处理器1010用于执行以下步骤:Processor 1010 is used to perform the following steps:
在所述终端设备的第一卡和第二卡间未形成双卡双通DSDA模式的情况下,确定满足预设条件的所述第一卡的第一候选频段,所述第一候选频段包括至少一个频段,所述预设条件包括第一条件和第二条件,所述第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足要求,所述第二条件包括:候选小区的频段能够和所述第二卡当前驻留的频段形成所述终端设备支持的DSDA模式,一个候选小区对应一个频段;When the dual-card dual-pass DSDA mode is not formed between the first card and the second card of the terminal device, determine the first candidate frequency band of the first card that meets the preset conditions, and the first candidate frequency band includes At least one frequency band, the preset condition includes a first condition and a second condition. The first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements. The second condition includes: the frequency band of the candidate cell can be compatible with the second card. The frequency band currently camped on forms the DSDA mode supported by the terminal equipment, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band;
根据所述第一候选频段中的目标频段,将所述第一卡驻留在所述目标频段上。According to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, the first card is camped on the target frequency band.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备900用于执行上述方法800中终端设备对应的各个流程和步骤。In another possible implementation, the terminal device 900 is used to execute various processes and steps corresponding to the terminal device in the above method 800.
处理器1010用于执行以下步骤:Processor 1010 is used to perform the following steps:
在所述终端设备的第一卡和第二卡间未形成双卡双通DSDA模式的情况下,确定满足第一预设条件的所述第一卡的候选频段和满足第二预设条件的所述第二卡的候选频段,所述第一卡的候选频段包括至少一个频段,所述第二卡的候选频段包括至少一个频段,所述第一预设条件包括:针对所述第一卡的候选小区满足S准则和R准则,所述第二预设条件包括:针对所述第二卡的候选小区满足S准则和R准则,一个候选小区对应一个频段;When the dual-card dual-pass DSDA mode is not formed between the first card and the second card of the terminal device, determine the candidate frequency band of the first card that satisfies the first preset condition and the candidate frequency band that satisfies the second preset condition. The candidate frequency band of the second card includes at least one frequency band, the candidate frequency band of the second card includes at least one frequency band, and the first preset condition includes: for the first card The candidate cells of the second card satisfy the S criterion and the R criterion, and the second preset conditions include: the candidate cells of the second card satisfy the S criterion and the R criterion, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band;
从所述第一卡的候选频段和所述第二卡的候选频段中,确定所述终端设备支持的能够形成DSDA模式的至少一个DSDA组合,每个DSDA组合包括所述第一卡的候选频段中的一个频段和所述第二卡的候选频段中的一个频段;Determine at least one DSDA combination supported by the terminal device that can form a DSDA mode from the candidate frequency band of the first card and the candidate frequency band of the second card, each DSDA combination including the candidate frequency band of the first card One of the frequency bands and one of the candidate frequency bands of the second card;
根据所述至少一个DSDA组合中的目标DSDA组合,对所述第一卡和所述第二卡的频段进行调整,以使得所述第一卡和所述第二卡分别驻留在所述目标DSDA组合中双卡对应的频段上。According to the target DSDA combination in the at least one DSDA combination, the frequency bands of the first card and the second card are adjusted so that the first card and the second card respectively reside in the target On the frequency band corresponding to the dual cards in the DSDA combination.
应理解,各个器件执行上述各个方法中相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of each device performing corresponding steps in each of the above methods has been described in detail in the above method embodiments, and will not be described again here for the sake of brevity.
应理解,在本申请实施例中,上述装置的处理器可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、
专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。It should be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the processor of the above device may be a central processing unit (CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), Application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor, etc.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件单元组合执行完成。软件单元可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器执行存储器中的指令,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。During the implementation process, each step of the above method can be completed by instructions in the form of hardware integrated logic circuits or software in the processor. The steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application can be directly implemented by a hardware processor for execution, or can be executed by a combination of hardware and software units in the processor. The software unit can be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other mature storage media in this field. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor executes the instructions in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在终端设备运行时,使得终端设备执行上述实施例中的技术方案。其实现原理和技术效果与上述方法相关实施例类似,此处不再赘述。Embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product. When the computer program product is run on a terminal device, it causes the terminal device to execute the technical solutions in the above embodiments. The implementation principles and technical effects are similar to the above-mentioned method-related embodiments, and will not be described again here.
本申请实施例提供一种可读存储介质,所述可读存储介质包含指令,当所述指令在终端设备运行时,使得所述终端设备执行上述实施例的技术方案。其实现原理和技术效果类似,此处不再赘述。Embodiments of the present application provide a readable storage medium. The readable storage medium contains instructions. When the instructions are run on a terminal device, the terminal device executes the technical solutions of the above embodiments. The implementation principles and technical effects are similar and will not be described again here.
本申请实施例提供一种芯片,所述芯片用于执行指令,当所述芯片运行时,执行上述实施例中的技术方案。其实现原理和技术效果类似,此处不再赘述。Embodiments of the present application provide a chip. The chip is used to execute instructions. When the chip is running, the technical solutions in the above embodiments are executed. The implementation principles and technical effects are similar and will not be described again here.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another, e.g., the computer instructions may be transferred from a website, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that contains one or more available media integrated. The usable media may be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (e.g., high-density digital video discs (DVD)), or semiconductor media (e.g., solid state disks, SSD)) etc.
应理解,说明书通篇中提到的“实施例”意味着与实施例有关的特定特征、结构或特性包括在本申请的至少一个实施例中。因此,在整个说明书各个实施例未必一定指相同的实施例。此外,这些特定的特征、结构或特性可以任意适合的方式结合在一个或多个实施例中。应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It will be understood that reference throughout this specification to "an embodiment" means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic associated with the embodiment is included in at least one embodiment of the present application. Therefore, various embodiments are not necessarily referred to the same embodiment throughout this specification. Furthermore, the particular features, structures or characteristics may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. It should be understood that in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
还应理解,在本申请中,“当…时”、“若”以及“如果”均指在某种客观情况下UE或者基站会做出相应的处理,并非是限定时间,且也不要求UE或基站实现时一定要有判断的动作,也不意味着存在其它限定。
It should also be understood that in this application, "when", "if" and "if" all mean that the UE or the base station will perform corresponding processing under certain objective circumstances. It does not limit the time and does not require the UE to Or the base station must have judgment actions when implementing it, and it does not mean that there are other restrictions.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解:本申请中涉及的第一、第二等各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围,也表示先后顺序。Persons of ordinary skill in the art can understand that the first, second, and other numerical numbers involved in this application are only for convenience of description and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of this application and also indicate the order.
本申请中对于使用单数表示的元素旨在用于表示“一个或多个”,而并非表示“一个且仅一个”,除非有特别说明。本申请中,在没有特别说明的情况下,“至少一个”旨在用于表示“一个或者多个”,“多个”旨在用于表示“两个或两个以上”。Elements referred to in the singular in this application are intended to mean "one or more" and not "one and only one" unless otherwise specified. In this application, unless otherwise specified, "at least one" is intended to mean "one or more", and "plurality" is intended to mean "two or more".
本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A可以是单数或者复数,B可以是单数或者复数。The term "and/or" in this article is just an association relationship that describes related objects, indicating that three relationships can exist. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and they exist alone. In the three cases B, A can be singular or plural, and B can be singular or plural.
本文中术语“……中的至少一个”或“……中的至少一种”,表示所列出的各项的全部或任意组合,例如,“A、B和C中的至少一种”,可以表示:单独存在A,单独存在B,单独存在C,同时存在A和B,同时存在B和C,同时存在A、B和C这六种情况,其中A可以是单数或者复数,B可以是单数或者复数,C可以是单数或者复数。The term "at least one of..." or "at least one of..." herein refers to all or any combination of the listed items, for example, "at least one of A, B and C", It can mean: A exists alone, B exists alone, C exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, B and C exist at the same time, A, B and C exist at the same time, among which A can be singular or plural, and B can be Singular or plural, C can be singular or plural.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented with electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each specific application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and simplicity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices and units described above can be referred to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and will not be described again here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. On the other hand, the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of the devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into one processing unit, each unit can exist physically alone, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
If the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of this application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code. .
本申请中各个实施例之间相同或相似的部分可以互相参考。在本申请中各个实施例、以及各实施例中的各个实施方式/实施方法/实现方法中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间、以及各实施例中的各个实施方式/实施方法/实现方法之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例、以及各实施例中的各个实施方式/实施方法/实现方法中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例、实施方式、实施方法、或实现方法。以上所述的本申请实施方式并不构成对本申请保护范围的限定。The same or similar parts between the various embodiments in this application can be referred to each other. In the various embodiments of this application and the various implementation methods/implementation methods/implementation methods in each embodiment, if there are no special instructions or logical conflicts, the differences between different embodiments and the various implementation methods/implementation methods in each embodiment will be different. The terminology and/or descriptions between implementation methods/implementation methods are consistent and can be referenced to each other. Different embodiments, as well as the technical features in each implementation method/implementation method/implementation method in each embodiment are based on their inherent Logical relationships can be combined to form new embodiments, implementations, implementation methods, or implementation methods. The above-described embodiments of the present application do not limit the scope of protection of the present application.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准总之,以上所述仅为本申请技术方案的较佳实施例而已,并非用于限定本申请的保护范围。凡在本申请的精神和原则之内,所作的任何修改、等同替换、改进等,均应包含在本申请的保护范围之内。
The above are only specific embodiments of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto. Any person familiar with the technical field can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application. should be covered by the protection scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims. In short, the above descriptions are only preferred embodiments of the technical solution of the present application and are not intended to limit the protection scope of the present application. Any modifications, equivalent replacements, improvements, etc. made within the spirit and principles of this application shall be included in the protection scope of this application.
Claims (14)
- 一种双卡通信的方法,应用于终端设备中,其特征在于,包括:A dual-card communication method, applied to terminal equipment, is characterized by including:在所述终端设备的第一卡和第二卡间未形成双卡双通DSDA模式的情况下,确定满足预设条件的所述第一卡的第一候选频段,所述第一候选频段包括至少一个频段,所述预设条件包括第一条件和第二条件,所述第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足要求,所述第二条件包括:候选小区的频段能够和所述第二卡当前驻留的频段形成所述终端设备支持的DSDA模式,一个候选小区对应一个频段;When the dual-card dual-pass DSDA mode is not formed between the first card and the second card of the terminal device, determine the first candidate frequency band of the first card that meets the preset conditions, and the first candidate frequency band includes At least one frequency band, the preset condition includes a first condition and a second condition. The first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements. The second condition includes: the frequency band of the candidate cell can be compatible with the second card. The frequency band currently camped on forms the DSDA mode supported by the terminal equipment, and one candidate cell corresponds to one frequency band;根据所述第一候选频段中的目标频段,将所述第一卡驻留在所述目标频段上。According to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, the first card is camped on the target frequency band.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一候选频段包括多个频段;以及,在所述根据所述第一候选频段中的目标频段,将所述第一卡驻留在所述目标频段上之前,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1, wherein the first candidate frequency band includes a plurality of frequency bands; and, based on the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, the first card resides in Before moving on the target frequency band, the method further includes:将所述第一候选频段中优先级最高的频段确定为所述目标频段。The frequency band with the highest priority among the first candidate frequency bands is determined as the target frequency band.
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述优先级最高的频段是所述第一候选频段中与所述第二卡当前驻留的频段形成的DSDA模式中双卡模式的能力最好的频段。The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the frequency band with the highest priority is the dual-card mode with the highest capability in the DSDA mode formed by the first candidate frequency band and the frequency band where the second card currently resides. Good band.
- 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述优先级最高的频段是所述第一候选频段中信号最强的频段。The method according to claim 2 or 3, characterized in that the frequency band with the highest priority is the frequency band with the strongest signal in the first candidate frequency band.
- 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端设备进行开机选小区的场景中,所述第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足S准则。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that, in a scenario where the terminal device performs cell selection at power-on, the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell satisfies the S criterion.
- 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端设备进行小区重选的场景中,所述第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足S准则和R准则。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that, in the scenario where the terminal equipment performs cell reselection, the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell satisfies the S criterion and the R criterion.
- 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端设备进行小区切换的场景中,所述第一条件包括:候选小区的质量满足用于小区切换的事件,所述用于小区切换的事件包括A3事件、A4事件、B1事件或B2事件中任一个。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that, in the scenario where the terminal device performs cell switching, the first condition includes: the quality of the candidate cell satisfies the event for cell switching, The event used for cell handover includes any one of A3 event, A4 event, B1 event or B2 event.
- 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述第一候选频段中的目标频段,将所述第一卡驻留在所述目标频段上之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 7, characterized in that, before parking the first card on the target frequency band according to the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, the method further includes:向网络设备发送用于指示所述目标频段的测量报告;Send a measurement report indicating the target frequency band to the network device;接收来自所述网络设备的切换指示,所述切换指示用于指示所述终端设备将所述第一卡驻留的频段切换至所述目标频段上。Receive a switching instruction from the network device, where the switching instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch the frequency band where the first card resides to the target frequency band.
- 根据权利要求6至8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述第一候选频段中的目标频段,将所述第一卡驻留在所述目标频段上,包括:The method according to any one of claims 6 to 8, characterized in that, based on the target frequency band in the first candidate frequency band, parking the first card on the target frequency band includes:根据所述目标频段,对所述第一卡的频段进行调整,以使得所述第一卡驻留在所述目标频段上。According to the target frequency band, the frequency band of the first card is adjusted so that the first card resides on the target frequency band.
- 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一卡为副卡,所述第二卡为主卡。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, characterized in that the first card is a secondary card and the second card is a primary card.
- 一种终端设备,其特征在于,包括:A terminal device, characterized by including:存储器,用于存储计算机指令;Memory, used to store computer instructions;处理器,用于调用所述存储器中存储的计算机指令,以执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法。A processor, configured to call computer instructions stored in the memory to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
- 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,用于存储计算机指令,所述计算机指令 用于实现如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that it is used to store computer instructions, the computer instructions For implementing the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
- 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,包括计算机指令,所述计算机指令用于实现如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized by comprising computer instructions, the computer instructions being used to implement the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
- 一种芯片,其特征在于,所述芯片包括:A chip, characterized in that the chip includes:存储器:用于存储指令;Memory: used to store instructions;处理器,用于从所述存储器中调用并运行所述指令,使得安装有所述芯片系统的通信设备执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法。 A processor, configured to call and run the instructions from the memory, so that the communication device installed with the chip system executes the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN202210601045.9 | 2022-05-30 | ||
CN202210601045.9A CN117202159A (en) | 2022-05-30 | 2022-05-30 | Dual-card communication method and terminal equipment |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2023231642A1 true WO2023231642A1 (en) | 2023-12-07 |
Family
ID=89002092
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2023/090157 WO2023231642A1 (en) | 2022-05-30 | 2023-04-23 | Dual-card communication method and terminal device |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN117202159A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2023231642A1 (en) |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20140274006A1 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2014-09-18 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and methods for avoiding call failures in dual-sim devices |
WO2018053746A1 (en) * | 2016-09-22 | 2018-03-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Techniques and apparatuses for opportunistically operating a dual receive, dual sim dual standby (dr-dsds) device as a dual sim, dual active (dsda) device |
CN111356159A (en) * | 2020-05-25 | 2020-06-30 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Network-resident mode adjusting method, device and storage medium |
CN113316206A (en) * | 2021-05-31 | 2021-08-27 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Cell reselection method, device, terminal equipment and storage medium |
WO2022061633A1 (en) * | 2020-09-24 | 2022-03-31 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Rrc configuration for single link, dual subscriber identity module dual active (dsda) |
-
2022
- 2022-05-30 CN CN202210601045.9A patent/CN117202159A/en active Pending
-
2023
- 2023-04-23 WO PCT/CN2023/090157 patent/WO2023231642A1/en unknown
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20140274006A1 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2014-09-18 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and methods for avoiding call failures in dual-sim devices |
WO2018053746A1 (en) * | 2016-09-22 | 2018-03-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Techniques and apparatuses for opportunistically operating a dual receive, dual sim dual standby (dr-dsds) device as a dual sim, dual active (dsda) device |
CN111356159A (en) * | 2020-05-25 | 2020-06-30 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Network-resident mode adjusting method, device and storage medium |
WO2022061633A1 (en) * | 2020-09-24 | 2022-03-31 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Rrc configuration for single link, dual subscriber identity module dual active (dsda) |
CN113316206A (en) * | 2021-05-31 | 2021-08-27 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Cell reselection method, device, terminal equipment and storage medium |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN117202159A (en) | 2023-12-08 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP7293386B2 (en) | NETWORK CONNECTION PROCESSING METHOD, RELATED DEVICES AND COMPUTER STORAGE MEDIUM | |
WO2021135815A1 (en) | Communication method and related device and communication system | |
WO2021175268A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for sharing mobile network hotspot, and hotspot sharing device | |
US20220346010A1 (en) | Data Sending/Receiving Method, Electronic Device, and Computer-Readable Storage Medium | |
CN111491341B (en) | Cell reselection method and terminal | |
EP4057699A1 (en) | Cell measurement method, measurement apparatus, terminal device, chip, and storage medium | |
WO2021169698A1 (en) | Connection management method and related device | |
US20220272563A1 (en) | Device control method and system, and related apparatus | |
CN111615177A (en) | Cell search method and user equipment | |
WO2022042264A1 (en) | Method, apparatus and system for switching access point | |
CN114070369A (en) | Antenna selection method and device | |
CN114449099B (en) | Method for adjusting equipment azimuth, terminal equipment and readable storage medium | |
CN115065997B (en) | Cell changing method and terminal equipment | |
CN116055988B (en) | Dual-card communication method and terminal equipment | |
CN116056064B (en) | Dual-card communication method and terminal equipment | |
WO2023231642A1 (en) | Dual-card communication method and terminal device | |
WO2023231643A1 (en) | Dual-card communication method and terminal device | |
CN113453327A (en) | Transmission power control method, terminal, chip system and system | |
CN113630823B (en) | Network measurement method, device, terminal equipment and computer readable storage medium | |
CN114980238B (en) | Wi-Fi access method and related equipment | |
WO2023236670A1 (en) | Data transmission management method, electronic device and storage medium | |
WO2024001735A1 (en) | Network connection method, electronic device, and storage medium | |
WO2023179432A1 (en) | Antenna switching method and terminal device | |
CN115529639A (en) | Network switching method and device, user equipment and readable storage medium |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 23814828 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |